DS 4 (2014) - Car

4 (2014) - Car DS - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free 4 (2014) DS in PDF.

📄 404 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice DS 4 (2014) - page 2
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Car
Brand DS
Model 4 (2014)
Category Compact Crossover
Length 4.27 m
Width 1.81 m
Height 1.53 m
Wheelbase 2.61 m
Curb Weight 1,200 - 1,400 kg
Fuel Type Petrol / Diesel
Engine Options 1.2L PureTech, 1.6L THP (petrol); 1.6L BlueHDi (diesel)
Power 120 - 200 hp
Transmission 6-speed manual or automatic
Fuel Consumption (combined) 4.0 - 6.5 L/100km
CO2 Emissions 105 - 145 g/km
Safety Features ABS, ESP, multiple airbags, emergency braking assist
Maintenance Oil change every 20,000 km or 12 months
Tire Pressure 2.2 bar front, 2.0 bar rear (recommended)
Fuel Tank Capacity 60 L
Warranty 3 years or 100,000 km

Frequently Asked Questions - 4 (2014) DS

What engine options are available for the DS 4 (2014)?
The DS 4 (2014) is available with several engines: a 1.2L PureTech petrol (130 hp), a 1.6L THP petrol (165-200 hp), and a 1.6L BlueHDi diesel (120-150 hp).
What is the fuel consumption of the DS 4 (2014)?
Fuel consumption varies by engine. Petrol versions average 5.5-6.5 L/100km, while diesel versions achieve around 4.0-5.0 L/100km.
How often should I change the oil on a DS 4 (2014)?
DS recommends an oil change every 20,000 km or 12 months, whichever comes first. Use 5W30 or 0W30 oil meeting PSA standards.
What type of transmission does the DS 4 (2014) have?
The DS 4 (2014) offers a 6-speed manual transmission or a 6-speed automatic transmission (EAT6).
Is the DS 4 (2014) a reliable car?
Overall, the DS 4 is considered moderately reliable. Common issues include electrical problems and automatic transmission quirks. Regular maintenance helps prevent major failures.
What are the common problems with the DS 4 (2014)?
Frequent issues include: timing chain wear on early THP petrol engines, diesel particulate filter (DPF) clogging if mostly driven short distances, and electronic faults with the touchscreen or parking sensors.
What is the towing capacity of the DS 4 (2014)?
The DS 4 (2014) can tow up to 1,500 kg braked trailer and 750 kg unbraked, depending on engine.
What tire size does the DS 4 (2014) use?
Standard tire sizes are 215/55R16 or 215/50R17, with 17-inch often on higher trims. Check your vehicle's tire placard.
Does the DS 4 (2014) have Bluetooth?
Yes, the DS 4 (2014) supports Bluetooth for hands-free calling and audio streaming via the infotainment system.
What is the boot capacity of the DS 4 (2014)?
The DS 4 (2014) has a boot capacity of 355 liters (expandable by folding the rear seats).

User questions about 4 (2014) DS

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual 4 (2014) - DS and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. 4 (2014) by DS.

USER MANUAL 4 (2014) DS

You can find your handbook on the CITROËN website, under "MyCitroën".

This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct and special contact with CITROËN.

Referring to the owner's handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with this symbol:

DS 4 (2014) - 1

DS 4 (2014) - 2

If the "MyCitroën" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the following address:

http://service.citroen.com

Select:

The Vehicle documentation link in the home page (no registration is needed),

the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.

You have access to your handbook on line, together with the latest information, identified by the symbol:

DS 4 (2014) - Select: - 1

We draw your attention to the following...

Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the equipment described in this document, depending on the trim level, version and the specifications for the country in which it is sold.

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system. Please note this specific warning and contact a CITROËN dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.

CITROËN has a presence on every continent, a complete product range, bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation, for a modern and creative approach to mobility. We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, getting to know each system, each control, each setting, makes your trips, your journeys more comfortable and more enjoyable.

Happy motoring!

Contents

Key

DS 4 (2014) - Key - 1

safety warning

DS 4 (2014) - Key - 2

additional information

DS 4 (2014) - Key - 3

contributes to the protection of the environment

DS 4 (2014) - Key - 4

programming a function with the configuration menu

DS 4 (2014) - Key - 5

refer to the page indicated

6

FAMILIARISATION

3.

ECO-DRIVING

388

394

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

DS 4 (2014) - ALPHABETICAL INDEX - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with illuminated blue and beige panels (no visible text or symbols)

MONITORING

38 Instrument panels
42 Rev counter
43 Warning and indicator lamps
54 Indicators
57 Manual test
60 Customisation

DS 4 (2014) - MONITORING - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with a Citroën logo on the screen (no readable text or symbols beyond branding)

MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN

64 Monochrome screen C

68 Colour screen

70 Trip computer

DS 4 (2014) - MONITORING - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car showing beige leather seat compartments (no text or symbols visible)

COMFORT ACCESS VISIBILITY

78 Ventilation

80 Manual air conditioning

82 Dual-zone digital air conditioning

86 Front demist - defrost

87 Rear screen demist - defrost

88 Front seats

93 Rear seats

94 Steering wheel adjustment

95 Mirrors

100 Remote control key

109 Alarm

112 Doors

114 Boot

115 Electric windows

117 Fuel tank

120 Misfuel prevention (Diesel)

DS 4 (2014) - MONITORING - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car's rear taillight with red LED highlights (no text or symbols visible)

124 Lighting controls

125 Daytime running lamps

128 Automatic illumination of headlamps

129 Welcome lighting

130 Headlamp adjustment

131 Directional lighting

133 Wiper controls

134 Automatic rain sensitive wipers

138 Courtesy lamps

139 Interior mood lighting

140 Boot lamp

DS 4 (2014) - MONITORING - 4

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, steering wheel, and side panel (no visible text or symbols)

144 Interior fittings

150 Front armrest

155 Boot fittings

DS 4 (2014) - MONITORING - 5

natural_image Close-up of a car's grille with metallic trim and reflective surfaces (no visible text or symbols)

SAFETY

162 Child seats

164 Deactivating the passenger's front airbag

171 ISOFIX child seats

175 Child lock

DS 4 (2014) - SAFETY - 1

natural_image Close-up of a silver sedan wheel rim and side mirror (no visible text or symbols)

SAFETY DRIVING FITTINGS CHILD

178 Direction indicators

178 Hazard warning lamps

179 Horn

179 Emergency or assistance call

180 Braking assistance systems

181 Trajectory control systems (ESP)

183 Front seat belts

187 Airbags

DS 4 (2014) - SAFETY DRIVING FITTINGS CHILD - 1

natural_image Close-up of a beige car gear shift lever inside a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

196 Electric parking brake

204 Manual parking brake

205 Manual gearbox

206 Electronic gearbox

210 Automatic gearbox

214 Hill start assist

215 Gear shift indicator

216 Tyre under-inflation detection

218 Stop & Start

221 Lane departure warning system

222 Blind spot sensors

226 Speed limiter

228 Cruise control

230 Parking space sensors

232 Parking sensors

DS 4 (2014) - SAFETY DRIVING FITTINGS CHILD - 2

natural_image Close-up of layered black and white material with wavy texture (no text or symbols)

CHECKS PRACTICAL

237 Bonnet
238 Running out of fuel (Diesel)
239 Petrol engines
240 Diesel engines
241 Checking levels
244 Checks

DS 4 (2014) - SAFETY DRIVING FITTINGS CHILD - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car's head and side profile with red light and circular highlight (no visible text or symbols)

INFORMATION

250 Temporary puncture repair kit
255 Changing a wheel
262 Snow chains
263 Changing a bulb
270 Changing a fuse
276 12 V battery
280 Energy economy mode
281 Changing a wiper blade
281 Very cold climate screen
282 Fitting roof bars
283 Towing the vehicle
285 Towing a trailer
287 Accessories

DS 4 (2014) - INFORMATION - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car wheel rim with BMW logo and alloy wheel (no text or symbols visible)

TECHNICAL DATA

292 Petrol engines
293 Petrol weights
294 Diesel engines
295 Diesel weights
296 Dimensions
297 Identification markings

omnolen

AUDIO AND TELEMATICS

301 Emergency or assistance
303 eMyWay
357 Audio system

Familiarisation

DS 4 (2014) - Familiarisation - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Familiarisation - 2

natural_image Side profile of a modern SUV (no visible text or symbols)

Exterior

Panoramic windscreen

This large glazed area provides incomparable visibility and light in the passenger compartment.

DS 4 (2014) - Panoramic windscreen - 1

12

DS 4 (2014) - Panoramic windscreen - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a car front view with labeled components (no text or symbols beyond basic labels)

Stop & Start system

This system puts the engine temporarily into standby during stops in the traffic (traffic lights, traffic jams, etc...). The engine restarts automatically as soon as you want to move off. The Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions, as well as noise levels when stationary.

DS 4 (2014) - Stop & Start system - 1

Directional lighting

This lighting automatically provides additional visibility when cornering.

DS 4 (2014) - Directional lighting - 1

131

Parking sensors

This system measures the size of a free parking space between two vehicles or obstacles.

DS 4 (2014) - Parking sensors - 1

230

Cornering lighting

At low speed, this lighting comes on automatically to improve vision when cornering, at intersections, when parking parking... making use of the front foglamp on the side in question.

DS 4 (2014) - Cornering lighting - 1

132

Exterior

Blind spot sensors

In certain conditions, this system detects the presence of a vehicle in the blind spot. It informs you by means of a warning lamp in the corresponding door mirror.

222

Exterior customising stickers

When washing your vehicle using a jet wash, keep the end of the lance at least 30 cm from the stickers.

Temporary puncture repair kit

This kit is a complete system, consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge, for the temporary repair of a tyre.

DS 4 (2014) - Temporary puncture repair kit - 1

natural_image Side profile sketch of a modern SUV with visible headlights and grille (no text or symbols)

250

Welcome lighting

This additional exterior and interior lighting, controlled remotely, makes your approach to the vehicle easier when the light is poor.

129

Under-inflation detection

This system continuously monitors the pressures of the tyres and alerts you in the event of under-inflation.

216

Opening

3-button remote control

DS 4 (2014) - 3-button remote control - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car key with a red curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

A. Folding/unfolding the key (first press this button).
DS 4 (2014) - 3-button remote control - 2

Complete or selective unlocking of the vehicle (rapid flashing of the direction indicators).

Opening the windows (hold until the desired position is reached).

DS 4 (2014) - 3-button remote control - 3

Selective unlocking of the boot.

DS 4 (2014) - 3-button remote control - 4

Normal locking (press once; fixed lighting of the direction indicators).

Closing the windows (hold until the desired position is reached).

100

Welcome lighting
DS 4 (2014) - 3-button remote control - 5

natural_image Line drawing of a car with headlights on, showing a spotlight and red warning symbol (no text or labels)

When a sensor detects a low level of light, the remote switching on of the dipped beam headlamps, the sidelamps and the side spotlamps makes your approach to the vehicle easier.

In the same way, the passenger compartment lighting, such as the courtesy lamps and the footwell lamps, comes on.

129

Opening

Boot

Diagram showing a car interior with a red arrow pointing to a key inserted into the dashboard, labeled with numbers 1 and 2.

  1. Selective unlocking of the boot.

  2. Opening the boot.

101, 114

Fuel tank

Diagram showing a gas pump icon with red laser beam interacting with a vehicle, indicating airflow or signal direction.

DS 4 (2014) - Fuel tank - 2

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a rotating shaft and housing with a red curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

A. Opening the fuel filler flap.

Capacity of the fuel tank: approximately 60 litres.

DS 4 (2014) - Fuel tank - 3

117, 120

Familiarisation

DS 4 (2014) - Fuel tank - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Fuel tank - 5

Panoramic windscreen

This includes a panoramic area in tinted glass to increase lighting and vision in the passenger compartment. Fitted with a blind on each side to improve temperature control and a sun visor to avoid dazzle.

DS 4 (2014) - Panoramic windscreen - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car front view showing the hood and side window (no text or symbols)

Diagram illustrating car dashboard and steering wheel movement with red directional arrows indicating motion or force vectors

Blind

To open it, take the blind by its central grip A, and pull it rearwards, guiding it to the desired position.
To close it, take the blind by its central grip A, and pull it forwards, guiding it to the desired position.
The sun visor should be in the folded position before moving the blind.

DS 4 (2014) - Blind - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior panel with no text or symbols

Sun visor

Fitted with a courtesy mirror and a ticket holder.

To avoid dazzle from the front, lower the sun visor.
To avoid dazzle from the side, disengage the sun visor from its central fixing and turn it towards the side window.

DS 4 (2014) - Sun visor - 1

Do not attach to or suspend heavy objects from the blind and its guide rails.

DS 4 (2014) - Sun visor - 2

Interior

Interior mood lighting

This dimmed lighting of the passenger compartment improves visibility inside the vehicle when the light is poor.

139

Electronic gearbox

This system offers driving combining a fully automatic mode and a manual mode.

206

Massage function

This system gives a lumbar massage for a period of 60 minutes. The massage is done in 6 cycles of 10 minutes each.

91

DS 4 (2014) - Massage function - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Audio and communication systems

These systems benefit from the following technologies: radio, CD player, USB player, Bluetooth system, satellite navigation system with colour screen, auxiliary sockets.

Radio

357

eMyWay satellite navigation system

303

Electric parking brake

It combines the functions of automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release when moving off. Manual application and release remains possible.

196

Instruments and controls

  1. Cruise control / speed limiter controls.
  2. Controls for optional functions.
  3. Steering wheel adjustment control.
  4. Lighting and direction indicator control stalk.
  5. Instrument panel.
  6. Driver's airbag. Horn.
  7. Controls for audio and telematic system.
  8. Controls for Bluetooth system or telephone.
  9. Bonnet release.
  10. Door mirror controls. Electric window controls.
  11. Fusebox.
  12. Manual headlamp height adjustment Lower side switch panel.
  13. Fuel filler flap opening switch.
    Upper side switch panel.
  14. Side adjustable air vent.
  15. Front side window demisting vent.

Diagram of car interior with numbered components for identification

DS 4 (2014) - Instruments and controls - 2

Instruments and controls

  1. Steering lock and ignition.
  2. Steering mounted control paddles for the electronic gearbox.
  3. Wiper / screenwash / trip computer control stalk.
  4. Speaker (tweeter).
  5. Windscreen demisting vent.
  6. Sunshine sensor.
  7. Passenger's airbag.
  8. Glove box / Audio/video sockets / Passenger's airbag deactivation switch.
  9. Heated seat control.
  10. Lumbar massage control.
  11. Electric parking brake.
  12. Gear lever for manual gearbox or selector lever for electronic or automatic gearbox.
  13. Large multifunctional storage unit.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

Roof consoles - Centre consoles

A B C D E

A. Rear view mirror.
B. Microphone for audio and telematic system.
C. Interior mood lighting.
D. Emergency call / Assistance call.
E. Courtesy lamp / Map reading lamps.

A B C D E

Diagram of car interior air intake with numbered labels pointing to various controls and gauges

  1. Central adjustable air vents.
  2. Monochrome screen and seat belt and front airbag warning lamp screen or colour and mapping screen.
  3. eMyWay Audio or satellite navigation system.
  4. Central switch panel.
  5. Heating / air conditioning controls.
  6. USB port/auxiliary Jack socket and cigarette lighter / 12 V accessory socket.
  7. Gear lever or selector.
  8. Manual or electric parking brake
  9. Portable ashtray.
  10. Front armrest.

Diagram of car interior air traffic control panel with numbered labels pointing to various controls and interfaces

DS 4 (2014) - Roof consoles - Centre consoles - 5

Sitting comfortably Driver's seat
Forwards-backwards

Height Manual adjustment Electric adjustment

Seat back angle 88 89

Sitting comfortably Front seats

Head restraint height and angle

DS 4 (2014) - Sitting comfortably Front seats - 2

90

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch and finger pressing on dashboard panel with red indicator finger pointing to the button

Lumbar

91

Steering wheel adjustment
Diagram showing car interior and steering wheel with numbered directional arrows indicating movement or flow

  1. Release the adjustment mechanism.
  2. Adjust for height and reach.
  3. Lock the adjustment mechanism.

As a safety precaution, these operations must only be carried out when stationary.

DS 4 (2014) - Sitting comfortably Front seats - 5

94

DS 4 (2014) - Sitting comfortably Front seats - 6

Other functions available...

Lumbar massage. Storing driving positions (driver's electric seat). Heated seats.

Sitting comfortably Front armrest

Familiarisation

DS 4 (2014) - Sitting comfortably Front armrest - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Sitting comfortably Front armrest - 2

natural_image Diagram showing vehicle head and dashboard components with red arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

For your comfort, the front armrest can be adjusted for longitudinal position and for height, depending on version.

Diagram showing car interior and exterior view with red arrows indicating directional changes in a vehicle's seat or vent.

It also has a storage compartment; this may be equipped with a 230 V / 50 Hz power socket.

DS 4 (2014) - Sitting comfortably Front armrest - 4

149, 150

Sitting comfortably Door mirrors

Diagram showing three labeled components (A, B, C) on a boat-like structure with documents and a globe icon.

Adjustment

A. Selection of the mirror to be adjusted.
B. Adjustment of the position of the mirror in the four directions.
C. De-selection of the mirror.

DS 4 (2014) - Adjustment - 1

95

DS 4 (2014) - Adjustment - 2

Other functions available...

Folding / Unfolding. Automatic tilting of the mirror in reverse gear for parking. Blind spot sensors.

Rear view mirror

Diagram showing two car side panels with labeled components and red directional arrows indicating rotation or movement.

Manual day/night model

  1. Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.
  2. Adjustment of the mirror.

Automatic day/night model

A. Brightness detection in automatic day/night mode.
B. Adjustment of the mirror.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic day/night model - 1

97

Front seat belts

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with numbered arrows indicating left and right turn directions

  1. Fastening the buckle.

  2. Height adjustment.

DS 4 (2014) - Front seat belts - 2

183

DS 4 (2014) - Front seat belts - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Front seat belts - 4

Seeing clearly

Lighting
DS 4 (2014) - Seeing clearly - 1

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps.

Dipped / main beam headlamps.

Ring B
DS 4 (2014) - Seeing clearly - 2

Front and rear foglamps.

DS 4 (2014) - Seeing clearly - 3

125

Direction indicators
110 130 STOP CITROEN 110 130 STOP CITROEN

Raise or lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will flash for as long as the stalk remains in this position.

Three fl ashes

Press the lighting stalk up or down once, without passing the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will flash three times.

This function can be used at any speed, but it is particularly useful when changing lane on high-speed roads.

DS 4 (2014) - Three fl ashes - 1

178

Wipers
A O AUTO B

Stalk A: windscreen wipers

133

Switching "AUTO" on / off

Press the stalk downwards and release.

134

Ring B: rear wiper

DS 4 (2014) - Ring B: rear wiper - 1

Park.

Intermittent wipe.

Wash-wipe.

137

Ventilation

I require...Manual Air Conditioning
Air distributionAir flowAir recirculation / Intake of outside airTemperatureManual A/C
HOTDS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 1DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 2DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 3DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 4DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 5
COLDDS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 6DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 7DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 8DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 9DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 10
DEMISTING DEFROSTINGDS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 11DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 12DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 13DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 14DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 15

Digital air conditioning: we recommend use of one of the three fully automatic modes by pressing the "AUTO" button.

DS 4 (2014) - Recommended interior settings - 16

Monitoring Instrument panels

C B A

A. With the ignition on, the bars indicate the level of fuel remaining.
B. With the engine running, its associated low level warning lamp should go off.
C. With the ignition on, the oil level indicator should show for a few seconds that the level is OK or correct, depending on version.

If the levels are not correct, top up the levels which are low.

DS 4 (2014) - Monitoring Instrument panels - 2

38

Warning lamps

DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 1

natural_image Front view of a car dashboard with three circular gauges (no visible text or labels)
  1. With the ignition on, the orange and red warning lamps come on.
  2. With the engine running, these warning lamps should go off.

If warning lamps remain on, refer to the page concerned.

43

Central switch panel

A B

A. Make an emergency call.

179,301
B. Access to CITROËN services.
179,301

5 6 C SETUP TRAVEYIC PHONE D E A

C. Hazard warning.

179
D. Central locking.
107
E Black panel (black screen).
60

Monitoring

Side switch panel

Diagram showing car safety icons with labels A through F, including vehicle symbols and a vehicle interior view.

Illumination of the warning lamp indicates the state of the system.

A. Deactivate the ESP/ASR system.

181

B. Deactivate the parking sensors.

232

C. Deactivate the Stop & Start system.

218

D. Activate the blind spot sensors.

222

E. Activate the lane departure warning system.

221

F. Deactivate the volumetric alarm protection.

109

DS 4 (2014) - Side switch panel - 2

Monitoring

Steering wheel with integrated controls

Cruise control / speed limiter controls

228, 226

Diagram with numbered annotations pointing to a layout or layout feature, possibly for technical or engineering purposes.

DS 4 (2014) - Steering wheel with integrated controls - 2

Optional functions controls

  1. Black panel (black screen).
    60
  2. Dashboard lighting dimmer.
    59

or

Control of the type 2 central instrument screen.

40
3. Courtesy lamp on / off.
138

or

Parking space sensors.

230

Audio system controls

306, 359

DS 4 (2014) - Audio system controls - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Audio system controls - 2

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved shapes and rectangular gaps, no text or symbols present

Bluetooth system or telephone controls

306, 359

Passenger safety

Passenger's front airbag

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered parts and red directional arrows indicating motion

  1. Open the glove box.
  2. Insert the key.
  3. Select the position: "OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" child seat, "ON" (activation), with front passenger or "forwards facing" child seat.
  4. Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

DS 4 (2014) - Passenger's front airbag - 2

188

Seat belts and passenger's front airbag

A B E D C G PASSENGER AIRBAG ON OFF F

A. Front left seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp.
B. Front right seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp.
C. Rear right seat belt unfastened warning lamp.
D. Rear centre seat belt unfastened warning lamp.
E. Rear left seat belt unfastened warning lamp.
F. Passenger's front airbag deactivated warning lamp.
G. Passenger's front airbag activated warning lamp.

183, 189

Starting

Ignition switch

Diagram showing a key inserted into a car with three red arrows indicating specific positions or features.

  1. Stop position.
  2. Ignition on position.
  3. Starting position.

When switching the ignition on and off, the speedometer needle, and the rev counter and fuel gauge bars go to the extent of their travel and then return to 0.

DS 4 (2014) - Ignition switch - 2

104

Hill start assist

DS 4 (2014) - Hill start assist - 1

natural_image Two identical car illustrations on a slope with red directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is fitted with a system which holds your vehicle stationary momentarily, the time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator, to help with moving off on a gradient.

This function is only active when:

  • the vehicle is completely stationary with your foot on the brake pedal,
  • certain conditions of gradient are met,
  • the driver's door is closed.

DS 4 (2014) - Hill start assist - 2

Do not get out of the vehicle during the hill start assist temporary holding phase.

DS 4 (2014) - Hill start assist - 3

214

Driving safely

Electric parking brake

A (P)

Manual application / release

Manual application of the parking brake is possible by pulling the control lever A.

With the ignition on, manual release of the parking brake is possible by pressing the brake pedal and pulling then releasing the control lever A.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual application / release - 1

With the engine running, on opening the driver's door there is an audible warning; apply the parking brake manually.

Do not leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on; they might release the parking brake.

Diagram showing vehicle interior with red traffic cone icons and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

Automatic application / release

Press the accelerator pedal and let the clutch pedal up (manual gearbox), the parking brake is released automatically and progressively as you move off.

With the vehicle at rest, on switching off the engine the parking brake is applied automatically.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application / release - 1

If this warning lamp is on in the instrument panel, the automatic application / release is deactivated; apply and release the parking brake manually.

① AUTO OFF

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application / release - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application / release - 4

Before leaving the vehicle, check that the brake warning lamp in the

instrument panel and the P warning lamp in the control lever A are on fixed (not flashing).

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application / release - 5

If you are towing a trailer or caravan or if the slope might vary (transport on a ferry, lorry, towing...) make a maximum manual application with a long pull on the control lever A to immobilise the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application / release - 6

Driving safely

Electronic gearbox

Diagram showing car gear shift controls with numbered labels for steering wheel and dashboard positions

This 6-speed gearbox offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

  1. Gear lever.
  2. Steering mounted "-" control paddle.
  3. Steering mounted "+" control paddle.

AUTO 2 K5000

Display in the instrument panel

The gear engaged or the driving mode selected appears in the instrument panel screen.

N: Neutral.
R: Reverse.

1 to 6: Gears engaged.

AUTO: Automated mode.

N M A M

Moving off

Select position N and press the brake pedal firmly while starting the engine.
Engage first gear by pulling the gear lever 1 towards position A or M, or

engage reverse by pushing the gear lever 1 towards position R.

Release the parking brake.
Take your foot off the brake pedal then accelerate.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 1

Driving safely

Automatic gearbox

Diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and a tool tip, likely illustrating a gear or switch mechanism.

This six-speed gearbox offers the choice of the ease of automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

  1. Gear lever.

  2. "S" (sport) button.

  3. "※" (snow) button.

D2 X1000

Display in the instrument panel

the driving mode selected and/or the gear engaged appear in the left hand screen in the instrument panel.

P. Park.
R. Reverse.
N. Neutral.
D. Drive (Automatic).
S. Sport programme.

※. Snow programme.

1 to 6. Gears engaged.

-. Invalid value in manual operation.

P

Moving off

Foot on the brake, select position P or N.
Start the engine.
Then select position R, D or M.
Take your foot off the brake pedal, then press the accelerator medal to move off.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 1

210

Driving safely

Stop & Start

Engine going into STOP mode

ECO

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine is put into standby automatically:

  • with a manual gearbox; at speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h), when you put the gear lever into neutral and release the clutch pedal,
  • with an electronic gearbox; at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N.

In certain circumstances the STOP mode may not be available; the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off.

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 1

218

Engine going into START mode

ECO

The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically:

  • with a manual gearbox; when you fully depress the clutch pedal,
  • with an electronic gearbox;

  • with the gear lever in position A or M, when you release the brake pedal,

  • or gear lever in position N and brake pedal released, when you change to position A or M,
    • or when you engage reverse.

In certain condition, START mode may engage automatically; the "ECO" warning lamp flashes then goes off.

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 1

219

ECO OFF

Deactivation / Reactivation

You can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the "ECO OFF" button; the button's warning lamp comes on.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation / Reactivation - 1

The system is reactivated automatically every time you start the engine with the key.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation / Reactivation - 2

Before refuelling or doing anything under the bonnet, you must switch off the ignition with the key.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation / Reactivation - 3

219

Familiarisation

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation / Reactivation - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation / Reactivation - 5

Driving safely

Blind spot sensors

Diagram showing a car interior with a red directional arrow and labeled components, likely indicating a vehicle or signal flow.

Activate the function by pressing control switch A; the warning lamp comes on in the switch.
DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 2

natural_image Top-down diagram of a vehicle detection system with two cars, a red laser beam, and a car silhouette (no text or symbols)

The warning lamp located in the door mirror comes on to warn you that a vehicle has arrived in the blind spot detection zone.

DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 3

222

Parking space sensors

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled components and directional arrow indicating movement or change.

Select the function by pressing control switch B; the corresponding warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel.
Operate the direction indicators on the side with the space to be measured; a message appears to confirm measurement is in progress.
Drive at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) during measurement.

One of these messages appears to indicate the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre:
Parking possible OK

Parking possible.

Parking difficult

Parking difficult.

Parking not advised

Parking not advised.

DS 4 (2014) - Parking space sensors - 5

230

Driving safely Speed limiter "LIMIT"

3 4 LIMIT 0 CROUS 1 2 5 BEER

  1. Limiter mode On / Off.
  2. Decrease the programmed value.
  3. Increase the programmed value.
  4. Speed limiter On / Off.
  5. Display the list of memorised speeds.

225

The values must be set with the engine running.

226

Cruise control "CRUISE"

1 2 3 4 LIMIT 0 DRUGER 5 BEW

  1. Cruise control mode On / Off.
  2. Programme a speed / Decrease the programmed value.
  3. Programme a speed / Increase the programmed value.
  4. Cruise control Off / Resume.
  5. Display the list of memorised speeds.

225

In order to be programmed or activated, the vehicle speed must be higher than 25 mph (40 km/h), with at least fourth gear engaged on a manual gearbox (second gear for an electronic gearbox or automatic gearbox).

Display in the instrument panel

CITROEN PAUSE CRUISE 110 km/h CITROEN Limit PAUSE 90 km/h

The cruise control or speed limiter mode appears in the instrument panel when it is selected.

DS 4 (2014) - Display in the instrument panel - 2

CRUISE

Cruise control

DS 4 (2014) - Display in the instrument panel - 3

LIMIT

Speed limiter

DS 4 (2014) - Display in the instrument panel - 4

228

Eco-driving

Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO_2 emissions.

Optimise the use of your gearbox

With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. During acceleration change up early.

With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.

The gear shift indicator invites you to change up: as soon as the indication to change up is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it straight away.

With an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode.

Drive smoothly

Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO_2 emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.

Control the use of your electrical equipment

Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.

Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open.

Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...).

Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.

Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.

Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.

Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.

As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices (film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.

Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.

Limit the causes of excess consumption

Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.

Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.

Observe the recommendations on maintenance

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.

Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side.

Carry out this check in particular:

  • before a long journey,
  • at each change of season,
  • after a long period out of use.

Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended by the manufacturer.

When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

Instruments and controls

DS 4 (2014) - Instruments and controls - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Instruments and controls - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with visible steering wheel, speedometer, and logo (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Instruments and controls - 3

Customisable colour instrument panel - Type 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A B C D AUTO's STOP AUTO 888 888 18888

Dials and screens

  1. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min).
  2. Gear efficiency indicator or gear lever position and gear engaged (electronic or automatic gearbox).
  3. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h).
  4. Cruise control or speed limiter setting.
  5. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
  6. Engine oil level indicator.

  7. Service indicator

(miles or km) then,

total mileage recorder.

These two functions are displayed

successively on switching on the ignition.

Lighting dimmer setting (when making an adjustment).

  1. Trip mileage recorder (miles or km).
  2. Fuel gauge and associated low fuel warning lamp.
  3. Range (miles or km).

Control buttons

A. Dial COLOUR: customisation of the background colour of the dials.
B. Screen COLOUR: customisation of the background colour of the screens.
C. Lighting dimmer (available in night mode).
D. Reminder of the servicing information Reset the service indicator or the trip mileage recorder.

Customisable colour instrument panel - Type 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

Dials and screens

  1. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min).
  2. Gear shift indicator or gear lever position and gear for an electronic or automatic gearbox.
  3. Speedometer (mph or km/h).
  4. Central screen.
  5. Fuel gauge and associated low fuel level warning lamp.

  6. Trip mileage recorder (miles or km).

  7. Service spanner (if a service is due or missed), total mileage recorder. (miles or km)

Control buttons

A. Dial COLOUR: customisation of the background colour of the dials.
B. Screen COLOUR: customisation of the background colour of the screens.
C. Dashboard lighting dimmer (in night mode).
D. Start a manual test (procedure for checking the status of systems and display of vehicle alerts).
Reset service indicator or trip mileage recorder.

Type 2 instrument panel central screen and controls

1 CITROEN Limit PAUSE 110 km/h 2 110 km/h 6.8 1/100 395 km

  1. Speed limiter or cruise control settings.
  2. Engine oil level indicator.

Reminder of the servicing information.

These functions are displayed successively on switching on the ignition, after the welcome sequence and before display of the active available functions.

Alert or information messages may be displayed temporarily.

Diagram showing car interior and steering wheel controls with labeled parts A and B, including directional arrows and distance markers.

This group of controls allows:

  • when stationary, configuration of the vehicle, central screen and instrument panel parameters (driving and comfort systems, language, units, sounds...),
  • when stationary and while driving, scrolling the active functions available (trip computer, navigation-guidance...).

Controls

There is a button and a thumb wheel to control the central screen in the instrument panel:

A. button on the end of the wiper stalk: run through the various active function available.
B. thumb wheel on the left of the steering column,

  • rotation (other than menu): scroll through the list of active functions available,
  • press: main menu, confirm the selection,
  • rotation (in a menu): move up or down in the menu.

Press thumb wheel B for access to the main menu and select one of the following functions:

- "Vehicle parameters",

- "Display adjustment",

- "Choice of sounds".

Turn the thumb wheel B to move around in the instrument panel central screen.
Press the thumb wheel B again to confirm the selection.

DS 4 (2014) - Main menu - 1

The main menu and its associated functions can only be accessed when stationary.

A message appears in the instrument panel central screen, above a certain speed threshold, indicating that the main menu cannot be displayed.

Vehicle parameters

This menu is used to activate or deactivate certain driving and comfort systems, classified in different categories:

  • "Access to the vehicle" (see "Access" section):
  • "Plip action" (Selective unlocking of the driver's door),
  • "Unlocking only boot" (Selective unlocking of the boot).
  • "Driving assistance":
  • "Parking brake automatic" (Automatic electric parking brake; see "Driving" section),
  • "Rear wipe in reverse gear" (Rear wiper coupled to reverse gear; see "Visibility" section),
  • "Speeds memorised" (Memorising speeds; see "Driving" section).

- "Vehicle lighting" (see "Visibility" section):

  • "Directional headlamps" (Main/additional directional lighting),
  • "Daytime lights" (Daytime running lamps).

- "Interior lighting" (see "Visibility" section):

  • "Follow-me-home" (Automatic timed operation of headlamps),
  • "Welcome lighting" (Interior/exterior welcome lighting).

Rev counter

Choice of sounds

This menu allows you to choose a family of polyphonic sounds from the four available. These sounds are grouped together in a family and are adapted to suit the situation and context (alert, confirmation, rejection, direction indicators, lighting left on, key in ignition...).

Display configuration

This menu is used to configure:

  • the display language of the central screen, from a pre-defined list,
  • the units: temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l),
  • the graphical presentation of the central screen, from a pre-defined list.

0 X1000

Approaching the maximum engine speed, the bars are displayed in red and flash, to indicate to you the need to change up a gear.

Warning and indicator lamps

Car dashboard display showing three gauges with Chinese labels and a central screen interface

Control panel interface with analog dials, display screen, and function buttons labeled in English

Visual indicators which inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction (warning lamp) or of the operation of a system (operation or deactivation indicator lamp).

When the ignition is switched on

Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. When the engine is started, these warning lamps should go off. If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information on the warning lamp in question.

Associated warnings

The illumination, fixed or flashing, of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen or in the type 2 instrument panel central screen.

Warning lamps

When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a malfunction which requires action on the part of the driver.

The warning comes on in the instrument panel or appears in the type 2 instrument panel central screen.

If your vehicle has a screen, a warning lamp coming on is always accompanied by the display of an additional message, to assist you in identifying the problem. If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Warning lampis onCauseAction/Observations
STOPSTOPfixed, alone or associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.Illumination of this warning lamp is associated with a serious fault with the braking system, power steering, engine lubrication system or cooling system.Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk that the engine will cut out while driving.Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Maximum coolant temperaturefixed red.The temperature of the cooling system is too high.Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary.If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.
Engine of pressurefixed.There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 1

Warning lampis onCauseAction/Observations
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 2Battery chargefixed.The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 3Brakingfixed, associated with the STOP warning lamp.The braking system fluid level has dropped significantly.You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Top up with brake fluid recommended by CITROËN.If the problem persists, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
+DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 4fixed, associated with the electric parking brake malfunction warning lamp, if the parking brake is released.The braking system has a fault.You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
+DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 5the STOP and ABS warning lamps.The electronic brake evidence distribution (EBFD) system has a fault.You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
[BA3T]Electric parking brakeparking.The application or release of the electric parking brake was interrupted.You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park on level ground, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 6+(P)!Electric parking brake malfunctionfixed.The electric parking brake has a fault.Automatic application/release is no longer possible. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. The parking brake can be released manually using the emergency release procedure. For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the "Driving" section.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 7Door(s) openfixed if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).A door or the boot is still open. Close the door or boot.
fixed and accompanied by an audible signal if the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 8Seat belt not fastened/unfastened *fixed, then flashing, accompanied by an increasing audible signal.The driver or front passenger has not buckled or has unbuckled their seat belt.Pull on the belt in question and insert the tongue in the buckle. This warning repeats the seat belt information given by the roof console warning lamps.
At least one rear passenger has unbuckled their seat belt.

* According to country.

DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 10

Warning lampis onCauseAction/Observations
SERVICEServicetemporarily, accompanied by a message.A minor malfunction has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.Identify the malfunction by reading the message displayed in the screen, such as, for example:- the opening of the doors, boot or bonnet,- the engine oil level,- the remote control battery,- the tyre pressures,- saturation of the particle emission filter on Diesel vehicles (see "Checks - § Checks/Particle emissions filter").For any other malfunctions, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.A major malfunction has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.Identify the malfunction by reading the message displayed in the screen and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Particle emissions filter (Diesel)fixed, accompanied by an audible signal message on the risk of blockage of the particle emissions filter.This indicates that the particle emissions filter is starting to become saturated.As soon as driving conditions allow, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 35 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.
fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and and a message that the particle emissions filter additive level is too low.This indicates the low level of the additive reservoir.Have the reservoir topped up as soon as possible by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 11Engine autodiagnosis systemflashing.The engine management system has a fault.Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed.The emission control system has a fault.The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 12Low fuel levelfixed, accompanied by and audible signal and a message.When it first comes on there remains approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank.At this point, you begin to use the fuel reserve.Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.This audible signal and message are repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0".Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres.Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 13Anti-lock System (ABS)BrakingThe anti-lock braking system has a fault.The vehicle retains conventional braking.Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 14Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR)The ESP/ASR regulation is active.The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle.
fixed, associated with illumination of the indicator lamp in the "ESP OFF" button, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.The ESP/ASR or hill start assist system has a fault.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 15Power steeringfixed.The power steering has a fault.Drive carefully at reduced speed.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 16+SERVICEUnder-inflationfixed.The pressure in one or more wheels is too low.Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.
accompanied by the Service warning lamp.The flashing then fixed monitoring system has a fault or no sensor is detected on one of the wheels.Under-inflation detection is not assured.Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 17Foot on pedalthe brakeThe brake pedal is not pressed.With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to start the engine (lever in position N).If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.
flashing.With an electronic gearbox, if you hold the vehicle on a rising incline using the accelerator for too long, the clutch overheats.Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 18Airbagstemporarily.This lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.This lamp should go off when the engine is started.If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed.One of the airbag pretensioner systems has a fault.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Warning lamps - 19Directional headlampsfishing.The directional headlamps system has a fault.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Warning lampis onCauseAction/Observations
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 1Left-hand flashing with buzzer. direction indicatorThe lighting stalk is pushed down.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 2Right-hand flashing with buzzer. direction indicatorThe lighting stalk is pushed up.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 3Hazard warning lamps with audible signal.The hazard warning lamps switch, located on the dashboard, has been operated.The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 4Sidelampsfixed.The lighting control is in the "Sidelamps" position.On vehicle where the daytime running lamps are deactivated, if the lighting control is in the "AUTO" position, the sidelamps come on as a luminous signature of the vehicle.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 5pped beam headlampsfixed.The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position or in the "AUTO" position in conditions of low light.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 6Main beam headlampsfixed.The lighting stalk is pulled towards you.Pull the stalk again to return to dipped beam headlamps.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 7Front foglampsfixed.The front foglamps are switched on.Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off the front foglamps.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 8Rear foglampsfixed.The rear foglamps are switched on.Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the rear foglamps.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 9Parking brakefixed.The parking brake is applied or not properly released.Release the parking brake to switch off the warning lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal.Observe the safety recommendations.For more information on the parking brake, refer to the "Parking brake" and "Electric parking brake" sections.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 10Electric parking brakeThe electric parking brake is applied.Release the electric parking brake to switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal,pull the electric brake control.Observe the safety recommendations.For more information on the electric parking brake,refer to the "Driving" section.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 11Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brakeThe "automatic application"(on switching off the engine) and "automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty.Activate the function (according to country) via the vehicle configuration menu or contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 12Diesel engine pre-heatingThe ignition switch 2nd position (ignition on).Wattbtil the warning lamp goes off before starting.The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by the climatic conditions (up to about thirty seconds in extreme climatic conditions).If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again,then start the engine.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 13Automatic wipingfixed.The wiper control is pushed downwards.Automatic front wiping is activated.To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 14Lighting dimmerfixed.The lighting dimmer is making an adjustment.You can adjust the level of illumination of the instruments between 1 and 16.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 15Passenger airbag systemfixed in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display.The control switch, located in the glove box, has been placed in the "ON" position.The passenger's front airbag is activated.In this case, do not install a "rear facing" child seat.Move the control switch to the "OFF" position to deactivate the passenger's front airbag.In this case, you can install a "rear facing" child seat.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 16Stop & Startfixed.When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic jams,...) the Stop & Start system has put the engine into STOP mode.The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to move off.
flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.STOP mode is temporarily unavailable.orSTART mode is invoked automatically.For more information on special cases with STOP mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start" section.
DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 17Parking space sensorsfixed.The parking space sensors function is selected.To start measurement, operate the direction indicator on the side of the space to be measured, and do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h). A message is displayed once the measurement has been completed.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 18

DS 4 (2014) - Operation indicator lamps - 19

Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.

This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lampis onCauseAction/Observations
DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation indicator lamps - 1Passengefised airbag systemsed in the instrument panel and/or seat belt and front passenger's airbag warning lamps display.The control switch, located in the glove box, is set to the OFF position. The passenger's front airbag is deactivated.Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the passenger's front airbag.In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rear-facing position.

Engine oil level indicator

CITROËN OL

This information is displayed for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, at the same time as the service information.

DS 4 (2014) - Engine oil level indicator - 2

The vehicle must be on level ground and the engine must have been off for more than 30 minutes for this level check to be accurate.

DS 4 (2014) - Engine oil level indicator - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Engine oil level indicator - 4
Oil level correct

DS 4 (2014) - Engine oil level indicator - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Engine oil level indicator - 6

Oil level incorrect

This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL" or the display of a specific message in the instrument panel, coupled with the service warning lamp and accompanied by an audible signal.

If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine.

DS 4 (2014) - Oil level incorrect - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Oil level incorrect - 2

Oil level indicator error

This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL--" or the display of a specific message in the instrument panel. Contact a CITROËN or a qualified workshop.

Dipstick

Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the dipstick and the oil filler cap on your engine.

DS 4 (2014) - Dipstick - 1

There are 2 marks on the dipstick:

  • A = max; never exceed this level (risk of damage to the engine),
  • B = min; top up the level via the oil filler cap, using the correct grade of oil for your engine.

Service indicator

CITROËN 19 100km

This information is displayed for a few seconds after switching on the ignition. It informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.

The point at which the service is due is calculated from the last service indicator zero reset. It is determined by two parameters:

the distance travelled,

- the time elapsed since the last service.

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears in the instrument panel central screen.

Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line or a specific message in the instrument panel central screen indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due. For example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due.

For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

DS 4 (2014) - Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due - 2

A few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total and trip distances.

DS 4 (2014) - Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due - 3

Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due

Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due.

For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

DS 4 (2014) - Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due - 2

A few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.

DS 4 (2014) - Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due - 3

Service overdue

For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible.

Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles (300 km).

For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

DS 4 (2014) - Service overdue - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Service overdue - 2

A few seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on.

DS 4 (2014) - Service overdue - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Service overdue - 4

The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the type of driving.

Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the two year service interval.

=0 30 210 23 0-1 0 000

Service indicator zero reset

After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:

switch off the ignition,

press and hold the ".../000" trip distance recorder zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,
when the screen indicates "="0" and the spanner disappears, release the button.

DS 4 (2014) - Service indicator zero reset - 1

This operation cannot be carried out while a reminder of the servicing information is being displayed.

Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at least five minutes for the zero reset to be registered.

Recalling the service information

You can recall the service information at any time.

Briefly press the ".../000" trip distance recorder zero reset button.

The service information is displayed for a few seconds, in the total distance recorder line or in the type 2 instrument panel central screen.

Manual test in the type 2 instrument panel central screen

This function allows you to check the status of the vehicle systems (reminder of the "activated"/"deactivated" status of the configurable functions) and to display the alerts log.

2301 000

With the engine running, to start a manual test, briefly press the ".../000" button on the instrument panel.

Maintenance due in 500 miles or 2 months 1/2 0 N 11940 min 60

The following information appears successively in the instrument panel central screen:

  • engine oil level indicator (see corresponding section),
  • service indicator (see corresponding section),
  • under-inflation detection (if your vehicle is fitted with this system; see the "Safety" section),
  • current warnings and alert messages, if any (see corresponding section for the warning lamp or system concerned),
  • status of configurable functions (see "Multifunction screens").

DS 4 (2014) - Manual test in the type 2 instrument panel central screen - 3

This information also appears every time the ignition is switched on (automatic test).

Distance recorders

The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

255.7km 945.8km

Total distance recorder

Measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its first registration.

000 000.0 km

Trip distance recorder

Measures the distance travelled since it was last reset to zero by the driver.

With the ignition on, press and hold this button until zeros appear.

Lighting dimmer

8/16 210 230 91/8 A 7000

Permits manual adjustment of the brightness of the instruments and controls in relation to the exterior brightness. Only operates when the vehicle lighting is on in night mode.

Activation

Press button A to change the brightness of the instruments and controls.
When the lighting reaches the minimum setting, release the button, then press again to increase it.

or

When the lighting reaches the maximum setting, release the button, then press again to reduce it.
When the lighting reaches the level of brightness required, release the button.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation - 1
This indicator and the lighting value appear in the middle of the instrument panel during adjustment to show the lighting level compared to the 16 levels available.

Diagram showing car door control panel with red directional arrows and a labeled component 'B' on the left side.

You can also modify the level of lighting by turning the thumb wheel B, located on the left of the steering wheel:

upwards; to reduce the level,

F downwards; to increase the level.

Deactivation

When the vehicle lighting is off, or in day mode (daytime running lamps on), pressing the button or turning the thumb wheel does not have any effect.

Black panel (black screen)

PHONE

System allowing certain screens to be switched off for night driving.

The instrument panel remains on with the vehicle speed, electronic or automatic gearbox gear selected, cruise control or speed limiter information, if in use, and the low fuel alerts as appropriate.

If there is an alert or a change in a function or to a setting, the black panel mode is interrupted.

Activation

With the vehicle lighting on, press this button again to activate the black panel.

Press once more to illuminate on the various screens again.

Customising the instrument panel colours

A B COLOR COLOR

In the instrument panel, you can change the colour of its dials (button A) independently from that of the screens (button B).

There are five colour variants, from white to blue.

press the appropriate button as many times as needed to obtain the desired colour.

Customising the polyphonic

sounds

This menu allows you to choose a family of polyphonic sounds from the four available. These sounds are grouped together in a family and are adapted to suit the situation and context (alert, confirmation, rejection, direction indicators, lighting left on, key in ignition...).

LIST SOURCE/ OK BAND MENU

DS 4 (2014) - sounds - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a car interior with red directional arrows indicating movement or flow, and a close-up view of the dashboard (no text or symbols)

For the type 1 customisable colour instrument panel

Press the "MENU" button for access to the main menu.
Select the "Personalisation-configuration" menu and confirm.
Select the "Choice of sounds" line and confirm.
Select the desired family of sounds and confirm.
Save the modifications by confirming "OK".

For the type 2 customisable colour instrument

Press the thumb wheel for access to the main menu.
Select the "Choice of sounds" line and confirm.
F Select the desired family of sounds and confirm.
Save the modifications by confirming "OK".

DS 4 (2014) - For the type 2 customisable colour instrument - 1

For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out these operation when stationary.

DS 4 (2014) - For the type 2 customisable colour instrument - 2

For safety reasons, these operations are only possible when stationary.

Multifunction screens

DS 4 (2014) - Multifunction screens - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

CITROËN NAV

DS 4 (2014) - Multifunction screens - 3

Monochrome screen C

Displays in the screen

16 57 Mar 25/01/11 76.00 MHz Ptem 1

This displays the following information:

  • time,
  • date.
  • ambient temperature (this flashes if there is a risk of ice),
  • parking sensor information,
  • parking space measurement,
  • current audio source,
  • telephone or Bluetooth system information,
  • trip computer (refer to the end of the section),
  • alert messages,
  • settings menus for the screen and the vehicle equipment.

Controls

Control panel interface with labeled buttons and a 'OK' button, showing various function keys and icons.

From the control panel of your audio system, you can press:

button A to chooses between the display of audio information in full screen or the shared display of audio and trip computer information,
the "MENU" button for access to the main menu,
the "▲" or "▼" buttons to scroll through the items on the screen,
the "◀" or "▶" buttons to change a setting value,
the "OK" button to confirm, or
the "Back" button to abandon the operation in progress.

Personalisation-configuration
DS 4 (2014) - Main menu - 1

Press the "MENU" button for access to the main menu :

  • "Multimedia",
  • "Telephone".
  • "Trip computer",
  • "Bluetooth connection",
  • "Personalisation-configuration",

Press the "◀" or "▶" button to select the menu required, then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.

DS 4 (2014) - Main menu - 2

"Multimedia" menu

With the audio system switched on, this menu allows you to activate or deactivate the functions associated with use of the radio (RDS, DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display) or to choose the media play mode (Normal, Random, Random all, Repeat). For more information on the "Multimedia" application, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.

DS 4 (2014) - "Multimedia" menu - 1

"Telephone" menu

With the audio system switched on, this menu allows you to make a call or view the various telephone directories.

For more information on the "Telephone" application, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.

DS 4 (2014) - "Telephone" menu - 1

"Trip computer" menu

This menu allows you to view information on the status of the vehicle.

Warning log

This summarises the status and warning messages for systems (active, not active or faulty), displaying them in succession in the multifunction screen.

Press the "MENU" button for access to the main menu.
Press the arrows, then the "OK" button to select the "Trip computer" menu.
In the "Trip computer" menu, select the "Warning log" line and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Warning log - 1

"Bluetooth connection" menu

Wit the audio system on, this menu allows a Bluetooth device (telephone, media player) to be connected or disconnected and the connection mode to be defined (hands-free, playing audio files).

For more information on the "Bluetooth connection" application, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.

DS 4 (2014) - "Bluetooth connection" menu - 1

"Personalisation-configuration" menu

Personalisation-configuration

Define the vehicle parameters

Choice of language ©®©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©©© © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © © ®

Display configuration

Choice of sounds

This menu gives access to the following functions:

  • "Define the vehicle parameters",
  • "Choice of language",
  • "Display configuration",
  • "Choice of sounds".

Defi ne the vehicle parameters

This menu allows you to activate or deactivate the following equipment, classified in different categories:

- "Access to the vehicle" (see the "Access" section):

  • "Plip action" (Selective unlocking of the driver's door),
  • "Unlocking boot only" (Selective unlocking of the boot).

- "Driving assistance":

  • "Parking brake automatic" (Automatic electric parking brake; see the "Driving" section),
  • "Rear wipe in reverse gear" (Rear wiper coupled to reverse gear; see the "Visibility" section),
  • "Speeds memorised" (Memorising speeds; see the "Driving" section).

- "Vehicle lighting" (see the "Visibility" section):

  • "Directional headlamps" (Main / additional directional lighting),
  • "Daytime lights" (Daytime running lamps).

- "Interior lighting" (see the "Visibility" section:

  • "Follow-me-home headlamps" (Automatic operation of headlamps after switching off the ignition),
  • "Welcome lighting" (Exterior and interior welcome lighting).

For example: setting of the duration of the "follow-me-home" lighting

Press the "◀" or "▶" buttons, to select the "Define the vehicle parameters" menu, then the "OK" button.

Define the vehicle parameters

Driving assistance

Access to the vehicle

Lighting

Vehicle lighting

Press the "▲" or "▼" buttons to select the "Interior lighting" line, then the "OK" button; then follow the same procedure to select the "Follow-me-home headlamps" line.

Lighting

DS 4 (2014) - Lighting - 1
OK

Press the "◀" or "▶" buttons to set the value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then press the "OK" button to confirm.

Lighting

Follow-me-home headlamps930 s
Welcome lighting930 s

OK

Press the "▲" or "▼" buttons, then the "OK" button to select the "OK" box and confirm or press the "Back" button to cancel.

Choice of language

Once this menu has been selected, you can choose the language used by the display from a pre-defined list.

Display configuration

This menu gives access to the following settings:

  • "Choice of units",
  • "Date and time adjustment",
  • "Display parameters",
  • "Brightness".

Adjusting the date and time

Press the "◀" or "▶" button to display the "Display configuration" menu, then press "OK".
Press the "▲" or "▼" button to select the "Date and time adjustment" button, then press "OK".
Press the "◀" or "▶" button to select the setting to modify. Confirm by pressing "OK", then modify the setting and confirm again to save the modification.
Adjust the settings one by one, confirming with the "OK" button.
Press the "▲" or "▼" button, then the "OK" button to select the "OK" box and confirm or the "Back" button to cancel.

Choice of sounds

This menu allows you to choose a family of polyphonic sounds from the four available. These sounds are grouped together in a family and are adapted to suit the situation and context (alert, confirmation, rejection, direction indicators, lighting left on, key in ignition...).

DS 4 (2014) - Choice of sounds - 1

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

Displays in the screen

TOE 1 pm 2011 OT OT Line Satellites: redles : 4 - 20 m.

Colour screen

Controls

NAV SETUP TRAFFIC PHONE A B RADIO MUSIC

It displays the following information automatically and directly:

  • time,
  • date,
  • altitude,
  • ambient temperature (the value displayed flashes if there is a risk of ice),
  • parking sensor information,
  • parking space measurement,
  • audio functions,
  • directory and telephone information,
  • satellite navigation system information.

From the navigation system control panel, to select one of the applications:

press the dedicated "RADIO", "MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", "PHONE" or "SETUP" button for access to the corresponding menu,
turn the dial A to select a function, an item in a list,
^B+ press button B to confirm the selection, or
press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.

"SETUP" menu

Configuration

Display configuration

Voice synthesis

Press the "SETUP" button for access to its menu. You can choose from the following functions:

  • "Display configuration",
  • "Voice synthesis".

Display configuration

This menu is used to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the date and time.

Setting the date and time

  • Press SETUP
  • Select "Display configuration" and confirm.
  • Select "Set date and time" and confirm.
    Select "Minute adjustment via GPS" to have the minutes set automatically by satellite reception.
  • Select the setting to modify. Confirm it by pressing OK, then modify the setting and confirm again to save the modification.
  • Adjust the settings one by one.
  • Select "OK" in the screen then confirm to save the setting.

Voice synthesis

This menu is used to adjust the volume for guidance messages and to select the type of voice (male or female).

DS 4 (2014) - Voice synthesis - 1

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

Trip computer

System that gives you information on the journey in progress (range, fuel consumption...).

Monochrome screen C
17 00 759 km 1 7.5 l/100 2 ECO 15:50 mn:s 17 00 759 km 7.5 l/100 2 ECO 15:50 mn:s 76.00 MHz Mem 1

A LIFT OK

Information displays

You can choose between two types of display by pressing button A:

  • the trip computer information appears temporarily above the audio information, displayed permanently in full screen, or
  • the trip computer and audio information both appear permanently in a shared screen.

x y z mm

Press the button, located at the end of the wiper stalk, to display the various trip computer tabs in succession.

DS 4 (2014) - Information displays - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Information displays - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Information displays - 4

- the current information tab with:

  • the range,
    • the current fuel consumption,
    • the Stop & Start time counter.

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and a red arrow indicating speed, next to a clock icon labeled '2s'.

DS 4 (2014) - Information displays - 6

- the trip "1" tab with:

• the distance travelled,
• the average fuel consumption,
- the average speed, for the first trip.

Trip zero reset

When the trip required is displayed, press the button on the end of the wiper stalk for more than two seconds.

Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.

DS 4 (2014) - Trip zero reset - 1

- the trip "2" tab with:

• the distance travelled.
• the average fuel consumption,
- the average speed, for the second trip.

Type 2 central instrument panel screen

CITRIGEN 1.10 LTR 6.8 V100 ECO 16.10 mL/s

Information displays

Press the button, located at the end of the wiper stalk

or

F turn the thumb wheel, located on the left of the steering wheel.

to display the following information in turn:

  • reminder of the speed,
  • instantaneous information,
  • trip "1",
  • trip "2",

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard controls with red directional arrows indicating movement or flow directions.

• information on the current audio source,
- black screen,
- navigation-guidance messages.

- Display of instantaneous information with:

  • the range,
    • the current fuel consumption,
  • Stop & Start time counter,

- Display of trip "1" with:

• the distance travelled,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the average speed,

for the first trip.

- Display of trip "2" with:

• the distance travelled,
• the average fuel consumption,
- the average speed,

for the second trip.

Multifunction screens

DS 4 (2014) - Information displays - 2

Diagram illustrating car speed adjustment with +2s and -2s speed indicators and directional arrows

Trip zero reset

When the required trip is displayed, press the thumb wheel located on the left of the steering wheel or the button on the end of the wiper stalk for more than two seconds.

Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures and trip "2" for monthly figures.

A few definitions...

DS 4 (2014) - A few definitions... - 1

Range

(miles or km)

This indicates the distance

which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank in relation to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled.

DS 4 (2014) - Range - 1

This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a significant change in the current fuel consumption.

When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).

DS 4 (2014) - Range - 2

If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Range - 3

Current fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

This is the average fuel consumption during the last few seconds.

DS 4 (2014) - Current fuel consumption - 1

This function is only displayed from 20 mph (30 km/h).

DS 4 (2014) - Current fuel consumption - 2

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

This is the average fuel consumption since the last trip computer zero reset.

DS 4 (2014) - Average fuel consumption - 1

The fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher than the official figures obtained by CITROËN during the first 3 000 miles (5 000 km) of the vehicle's life.

Average speed

DS 4 (2014) - Average speed - 1

(mph or km/h)

This is the average speed calculated

since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on).

DS 4 (2014) - Average speed - 2

Distance travelled

(miles or km)

This indicates the distance

travelled since the last trip computer zero reset.

DS 4 (2014) - Distance travelled - 1

Stop & Start time nter

(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)

If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

75 Multifunction screens

DS 4 (2014) - Stop & Start time nter - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Stop & Start time nter - 2

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

Comfort

DS 4 (2014) - Comfort - 1

natural_image Abstract line and symbol design with geometric shapes and colors (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Comfort - 2

natural_image Interior view of a luxury car showing leather seat and neck panels (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - Comfort - 3

Ventilation

Air intake

The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.

Air treatment

The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver:

  • direct arrival in the passenger compartment (air intake),
  • passage through a heating circuit (heating),
  • passage through a cooling circuit (air conditioning).

Control panel

The controls of this system are grouped together on control panel A on the centre console.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and airflow indicators, likely for vehicle or air quality monitoring.

Air distribution

  1. Windscreen demisting-defrosting vents.
  2. Front side window demisting-defrosting vents.
  3. Side adjustable air vents.

  4. Central adjustable air vents.

  5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
  6. Air nozzles to the front footwells.
  7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.

Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

DS 4 (2014) - Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning - 1

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below:

To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation of the air conditioning system.
Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in perfect working order.
Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly.

We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).

To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the maintenance and warranty guide.
If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.

Stop & Start

The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system (see the corresponding section).

DS 4 (2014) - Stop & Start - 1

If after an extended stop in sunshine, the interior temperature is very high, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few moments.

Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment.

The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.

DS 4 (2014) - Stop & Start - 2

The condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.

Manual air conditioning

The air conditioning system operates only with the engine running.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual air conditioning - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Manual air conditioning - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Manual air conditioning - 3

1. Temperature adjustment

DS 4 (2014) - Temperature adjustment - 1

Turn the dial to select a position between blue (cold) and red (hot) so as to adjust the temperature to your requirements.

2. Air flow adjustment

DS 4 (2014) - Air flow adjustment - 1

This dial is used to increase or decrease the speed of the air booster fan.

Turn the dial from position 1 to position 5 to obtain a comfortable air flow.

DS 4 (2014) - Air flow adjustment - 2

If you place the air flow control in position 0, the system is deactivated. However, a slight flow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.

DS 4 (2014) - Air flow adjustment - 3

Avoid driving too long with the ventilation off (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).

3. Air distribution adjustment

This dial is used to arrange the distribution of air in the passenger compartment by combining several air outlets.

DS 4 (2014) - Air distribution adjustment - 1

Windscreen and side windows.

DS 4 (2014) - Air distribution adjustment - 2

Windscreen, side windows and footwells.

DS 4 (2014) - Air distribution adjustment - 3

Footwells.

DS 4 (2014) - Air distribution adjustment - 4

Central and side vents.

DS 4 (2014) - Air distribution adjustment - 5

The air distribution can be adapted by placing the dial in an intermediate position.

4. Air intake / Air recirculation

The intake of exterior air prevents the formation of mist on the windscreen and side windows.

The recirculation of interior air isolates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and smoke.

DS 4 (2014) - Air intake / Air recirculation - 1

This function allows hot or cold air to be delivered selectively and more quickly.

Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible to prevent deterioration of the the air quality and the formation of mist.

DS 4 (2014) - Air intake / Air recirculation - 2

Press the button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp comes on to confirm this.

Press the button again to permit the intake of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off to confirm this.

5. Air conditioning On/Off

DS 4 (2014) - Air conditioning On/Off - 1

The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

It enables you to:

- lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3 °C.

Switching on

Press the "A/C" button, the button's indicator lamp comes on.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching on - 1

The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment control 2 is in position "0".

To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use recirculation of interior air for a few moments. Then return to fresh air intake.

Switching off

Press the "A/C" button again, the button's indicator lamp goes off. Switching off may affect comfort levels (humidity, condensation).

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

The air conditioning system operates when the engine is running.

Automatic operation

AUTO 20.5 7 8 A/C 21 9 REST

1. Automatic comfort programme

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic comfort programme - 1

We recommend the use of one of the three AUTO modes available: they provide optimised regulation of the temperature in the passenger

compartment according to the comfort value that you have chosen.

These three modes automatically adjust the air flow, according to the desired setting, while also maintaining the desired comfort value.

This system is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

Press the "AUTO" button repeatedly:

  • a first indicator lamp comes on; the "light" setting mode is selected,
  • a second indicator lamp comes on; the "medium" setting mode is selected,
  • a third indicator lamp comes on; the "intense" mode setting is selected.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic comfort programme - 2

When the engine is cold, the air flow will reach its optimum level progressively, taking account of the weather and the desired comfort level so as to avoid too great a distribution of cold air.

On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value, there is no need to change the value displayed in order to obtain the comfort required. The system corrects the difference in temperature automatically and as quickly as possible.

2. Driver's side adjustment

3. Passenger's side adjustment

DS 4 (2014) - Passenger's side adjustment - 1

The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature to their requirements.

The value indicated on the display

corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.

Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to the right respectively to decrease or increase this value.

A setting around the value 21 provides optimum comfort. However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is normal.

You are advised to avoid a left / right setting difference of more than 3.

4. Automatic visibility programme

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic visibility programme - 1

See "Front demisting - defrosting".

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic visibility programme - 2

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.

Manual operation

If you wish, you can make a different choice from that offered by the system by changing a setting. The the "AUTO" indicator lamps go off; the other functions will still be controlled automatically.

Pressing the "AUTO" button returns the system to completely automatic operation.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual operation - 1

For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, it is possible to exceed the minimum value 14 or the maximum value 28.

Turn control 2 or 3 to the left until "LO" is displayed or to the right until "HI" is displayed.

5. Air conditioning On / Off

DS 4 (2014) - Air conditioning On / Off - 1

Press this button to switch off the air conditioning.

Switching the system off could result in discomfort (humidity, condensation).

Press this button again to return to automatic operation of the air conditioning. The indicator lamp on the "A/C" button comes on.

6. Air distribution adjustment

DS 4 (2014) - Air distribution adjustment - 1

Press one or more buttons to direct the air flow towards:

  • the windscreen and side windows (demisting or defrosting),
  • the outer and centre air vents,
  • the footwells.

You can combine the three orientations to obtain the desired air distribution.

7. Air flow adjustment

DS 4 (2014) - Air flow adjustment - 1

Turn this control to the left to decrease the air flow or to the right to increase the air flow.

The air flow indicator lamps, between the two fans, come on progressively in relation to the value requested.

8. Air intake / Air recirculation

DS 4 (2014) - Air intake / Air recirculation - 1

Press this button for recirculation of the interior air. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

Air recirculation enables the passenger compartment to be isolated from exterior odours and smoke.

As soon as possible, press this button again to permit the intake of outside air and prevent the formation of condensation. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

9. "REST" function: ventilation with the engine off

DS 4 (2014) - "REST" function: ventilation with the engine off - 1

Even with the engine is off, you can operate the ventilation for a few minutes.

For example, while you are away from the vehicle, the passengers can still enjoy some air circulation without having the engine running. This function is available after switching on the ignition, as well as after stopping the engine.

The period that the function is available depends on the state of charge of the battery. You can activate the "REST" function while the air conditioning control screens are on.

DS 4 (2014) - "REST" function: ventilation with the engine off - 2

Avoid prolonged operation in interior air recirculation mode (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).

On switching on the engine

  • The control screens come on: the function is available.
  • Pressing the REST button activates the ventilation for a few minutes. Activation of the function is confirmed by the display of two dashes in the control screens and four air flow level indicator lamps.
  • The function can be deactivated and reactivated if the control screens are on.
  • The screens go off at the end of this period.

On stopping the engine

  • While the control screens remain on: the function is available.
  • Pressing the REST button activates the ventilation for a few minutes. Activation of the function is confirmed by the display of two dashes in the control screens and four air flow level indicator lamps.

Locking the vehicle has no effect on this function.

- The control screens go off at the end of this period.

Pressing again before the end of the period interrupts off the ventilation definitively: the control screens go off and the function is no longer available.

Switching the system off

DS 4 (2014) - Switching the system off - 1

Turn the air flow control to the left until all of the indicator lamps go off.

This action switches off the air conditioning and the ventilation.

Temperature related comfort is no longer assured but a slight flow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.

Modify the settings (temperature, air flow or air distribution) or press the "AUTO" button to reactivate the system with the values set before it was switched off.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching the system off - 2

This switch does not operate the air conditioning, only the air fan.

When the "REST" function is activated, you cannot modify the temperature, air flow and distribution settings: these are controlled automatically according to the ambient temperature.

This function is not available in the STOP mode of Stop & Start.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching the system off - 3

Avoid prolonged operation in interior air recirculation mode or driving for long periods with the system off (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).

Front demist - defrost

DS 4 (2014) - Front demist - defrost - 1

These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.

With manual air conditioning

Put the temperature, air flow and distribution controls to the dedicated marked position.
Put the air intake control to the "Exterior air intake" position (indicator lamp on the control off).
Switch on the air conditioning by pressing the "A/C" button; the warning lamp in the button comes on.

DS 4 (2014) - With manual air conditioning - 1

With Stop & Start, when the demisting, air conditioning and air flow functions are activated, STOP mode is not available.

With digital dual-zone air conditioning

Automatic visibility programme

Select this programme to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows as quickly as possible.

The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows.

To stop the programme, press either the "visibility" button again or "AUTO", the warning lamp on the button goes off and the warning lamp on the "AUTO" button comes on.

The system starts again with the values in use before it was overridden by the visibility programme.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic visibility programme - 1

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.

Rear screen demist - defrost

Comfort

DS 4 (2014) - Rear screen demist - defrost - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Rear screen demist - defrost - 2

The control button is located on the air conditioning system control panel.

Switching on

The rear screen demisting/defrosting can only operate when the engine is running.

Press this button to demist/defrost the rear screen and (depending on version) the door mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.

Switching off

The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.

It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again. The indicator lamp associated with the button goes off.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching off - 1

Switch off the demisting/defrosting of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as appropriate, as lower current consumption results in reduced fuel consumption.

Front seats

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

Manual adjustments
DS 4 (2014) - Front seats - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a car seat with red directional arrows indicating movement or force, and a side view of the dashboard (no text or symbols)

Forwards-backwards

F Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Forwards-backwards - 1

natural_image Diagram showing car seat and seat assembly with red directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Driver's or passenger's seat height

Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as necessary, to obtain the position required.

DS 4 (2014) - Driver's or passenger's seat height - 1

As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be done when stationary.

DS 4 (2014) - Driver's or passenger's seat height - 2

natural_image Diagram showing car seat and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

Seat backrest angle

Turn the control knob to adjust the seat backrest angle.

DS 4 (2014) - Seat backrest angle - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Seat backrest angle - 2

Front seats

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat backrest and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

Driver's seat electric adjustments
Diagram showing car seat and dashboard with red directional arrows indicating movement or change

Forwards-backwards

Push the control forwards or rearwards to slide the seat.

DS 4 (2014) - Forwards-backwards - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car seat assembly showing seatbelt, seatbelt, and seatbelt with red directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Cushion height and angle

Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required height.
√ Tilt the front part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required angle.

DS 4 (2014) - Cushion height and angle - 1

The electrical functions of the driver's seat are deactivated approximately one minute after the ignition is switched off. To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.

DS 4 (2014) - Cushion height and angle - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car seat with red directional arrows indicating movement or force, no text or symbols present

Seat backrest angle

Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to adjust the angle of the seat backrest.

Additional adjustments

DS 4 (2014) - Additional adjustments - 1

natural_image Diagram of a biological structure with red arrows indicating movement or force, labeled 'A' at bottom right (no text or symbols on diagram itself)

Head restraint height and angle

To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.
To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt its lower part forwards or rearwards.

Removing a head restraint

To remove the head restraint, press the lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
To put the head restraint back in place, engage the head restraint stems in the openings keeping them in line with the seat back and press the lug A at the same time.

The head restraint is fitted with a frame with notches which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety device in case of impact.

The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head.

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.

Diagram showing a device with a red triangular pointer and a digital thermometer displaying measurement ranges.

Heated seats control

With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately.

Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side of each front seat, to switch on and select the level of heating required:

0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.

DS 4 (2014) - Heated seats control - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Manual lumbar adjustment

Turn the knob to obtain the desired level of lumbar support.

DS 4 (2014) - Heated seats control - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a car interior with seatbelt, rear seats, and a red triangular highlight (no text or symbols)

Electric lumbar adjustment

Press the front or rear of the control to obtain the desired lumbar support.

Massage function
Diagram showing a device with labeled buttons and a red triangular pointer indicating action or status

This function provides a back massage; it only operates when the engine is running.

Press the switch to activate the function. The warning lamp on the switch comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 60 minutes. During this time, massage is performed in 6 cycles of 10 minutes each cycle (6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes break).

After an hour, the function is automatically deactivated. The warning lamp in the switch goes off.

Deactivation

You can deactivate the massage function at any time by pressing the switch. The movement in progress continues until the initial non-massage position is reached.

Storing driving positions

1 2 M 000

System which registers the electrical settings of the driver's seat and door mirrors. It enables you to store and recall two positions using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.

Storing a position

Using buttons M / 1 / 2

Switch on the ignition.
Adjust your seat and the door mirrors.
Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds.

An audible signal indicates that the position has been stored.

DS 4 (2014) - Using buttons M / 1 / 2 - 1

Storing a new position cancels the previous position.

Recalling a stored position

Ignition on or engine running

Press button 1 or 2 to recall the corresponding position.
An audible signal confirms that adjustment is complete.

DS 4 (2014) - Ignition on or engine running - 1

You can interrupt the current movement by pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the seat controls.

A stored position cannot be recalled while driving.

Recalling stored positions is deactivated 45 seconds after switching off the ignition.

Rear seats

Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and split backrest (left hand 2/3, right hand 1/3) which can be folded individually to adapt the load space in the boot.

Folding the backrest

DS 4 (2014) - Folding the backrest - 1

natural_image Diagram of car seatbelt buckle assembly showing two side seats with red arrows indicating seatbelt placement (no text or labels)

Move the corresponding front seat forward if necessary.
Position the seat belt between the outer and centre head restraints to avoid trapping the belt when repositioning the seat backrest.
Place the head restraints in the low position.

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with numbered instructions and red directional arrows indicating movement or force.

DS 4 (2014) - Folding the backrest - 3

natural_image Diagram of a device with a lever and red circular arrow indicating rotation, shown in an airplane (no text or symbols)

Pull control 1 forwards to release the seat back 2.
Fold the seat back 2 on to the cushion.

Repositioning the seat backrest

Straighten the seat back 2 and secure it.
Check that the red indicator, located next to the control 1, is no longer visible.
Put the seat belt back in place on the side of the seat backrest.

DS 4 (2014) - Repositioning the seat backrest - 1

When repositioning the seat backrest, take care not to trap the seat belts.

Steering wheel adjustment

Rear head restraints

DS 4 (2014) - Rear head restraints - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a car seat with an upward arrow and a red circle labeled 'A' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

These have one position for use (up) and a stowed position (down).

They can also be removed.

To remove a head restraint:

release the backrest using control 1,
- tilt the backrest 2 slightly forwards,
pull the head restraint upwards to the stop,
then, press the lug A.

DS 4 (2014) - Rear head restraints - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

When stationary, pull the control lever to release the adjustment mechanism.
Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position.
Push the control lever to lock the adjustment mechanism.

DS 4 (2014) - Rear head restraints - 3

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and correctly adjusted.

DS 4 (2014) - Rear head restraints - 4

As a safety precaution, these operations should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.

Mirrors

Door mirrors

DS 4 (2014) - Door mirrors - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded for parking in confined spaces.

Demisting - Defrosting

DS 4 (2014) - Demisting - Defrosting - 1

If your vehicle is fitted with heated mirrors, the demisting-defrosting operates by switching on the heated rear screen (refer to the "Rear screen demist-defrost" page).

The rear screen demist - defrost can only operate when the engine is running.

Diagram showing a device with labeled points A and B, indicating positions or features in a circular layout.

Adjustment

Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.
Move control B in all four directions to adjust.
Return control A to the central position.

DS 4 (2014) - Adjustment - 1

The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear. Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

Folding

From outside: lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.
From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A in the central position rearwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Folding - 1

If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on control A.

Unfolding

From outside: unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.
From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A in the central position rearwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Unfolding - 1

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Unfolding - 2

Never fold or unfold the electric folding mirrors manually.

Diagram showing a device with labeled components including a red circle labeled 'A' and three circular icons below, likely representing a system or interface.

Programming

With the engine running, engage reverse gear.
Select and adjust the left-hand and right-hand mirrors in succession.
The adjustment is stored immediately.

Switching off

Exit reverse gear and wait ten seconds. or
Return control A to the central position. The mirror glass returns to its initial position. The mirror glass also returns to its initial position:

- if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),

- if the engine is switched off.

Automatic tilting in reverse gear Switching on

System which provides a view of the ground during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.

With the engine running, engage reverse gear.
Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.

The glass of the mirror selected tilts downwards, in accordance with its programming.

Rear view mirror

Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...

DS 4 (2014) - Rear view mirror - 1

As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".

Manual day/night model
DS 4 (2014) - Rear view mirror - 2

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car frontview mirror with a red arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

Automatic day/night model
DS 4 (2014) - Rear view mirror - 3

natural_image Simple line drawing of a rectangular basin with a red arrow pointing to the bottom (no text or symbols)

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position.

By means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle, this system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses.

Day/night position

Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the normal "day" position.

DS 4 (2014) - Day/night position - 1

In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

Comfort

DS 4 (2014) - Day/night position - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Day/night position - 3

004

DS 4 (2014) - 004 - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric line drawing with two triangles and a separate curved line (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - 004 - 2

natural_image Side profile of a black car with a silver door and red logo, showing exterior and side views (no text or symbols)

Remote control key

System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the door lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.

Unlocking the vehicle

DS 4 (2014) - Unlocking the vehicle - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car key with a red arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Unfolding the key

Press this button to unfold the key.

Complete unlocking using the remote control

DS 4 (2014) - Complete unlocking using the remote control - 1

Press the open padlock to unlock the vehicle completely.

Selective unlocking using the remote control

DS 4 (2014) - Selective unlocking using the remote control - 1

Press the open padlock once to unlock the driver's door only.

Press the open padlock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.

Programming the unlocking

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the unlocking - 1

The complete or selective door unlocking parameter is set via the vehicle configuration menu.

Opening the windows using the remote control

DS 4 (2014) - Opening the windows using the remote control - 1

Maintain the press on the open padlock until the desired position is obtained. The windows stop as soon as you release the button.

DS 4 (2014) - Opening the windows using the remote control - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Opening the windows using the remote control - 3

Unlocking using the key

Turn the key forwards in the driver's door lock to unlock the vehicle completely.

DS 4 (2014) - Unlocking using the key - 1

The direction indicators flash for a few seconds.

The spotlamps in the door mirrors come on.

Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold, the welcome lighting comes on, the alarm is deactivated.

Selective unlocking of the boot

DS 4 (2014) - Selective unlocking of the boot - 1

Press the central button on the remote control to unlock the boot. The doors remain locked.

If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated, pressing this button also unlocks the doors.

DS 4 (2014) - Selective unlocking of the boot - 2

Don't forget to lock the boot again by pressing the closed padlock button.

Programming the unlocking

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the unlocking - 1

The complete or selective boot unlocking parameter is set via the vehicle configuration menu. Selective unlocking of the boot is activated by default.

Locking the vehicle

Normal locking using the remote control

DS 4 (2014) - Normal locking using the remote control - 1

Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle.

Normal locking using the key

Turn the key towards the rear in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle.

The direction indicators flash for a few seconds.

Depending on version, the door mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.

If one of the doors or the boot is still open, the central locking does not take place. However, the alarm (if present) will be completely activated after about 45 seconds. If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and with no action on the doors or boot, the vehicle will lock itself again automatically after about 30 seconds. If the alarm had previously been activated, it will not be reactivated automatically.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Closing the windows using the remote control

DS 4 (2014) - Closing the windows using the remote control - 1

Press and hold down the closed padlock until the desired position is obtained. The windows stop when you release the button.

When closing the windows using the remote control you must ensure that nothing prevents them from closing correctly. If you want to leave the windows partly open, you must deactivate the volumetric alarm monitoring.

DS 4 (2014) - Closing the windows using the remote control - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car key with red directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Folding the key

F First press this button to fold the key.

DS 4 (2014) - Folding the key - 1

If you do not press the button when folding the key, there is a risk of damage to the mechanism.

Locating your vehicle

DS 4 (2014) - Locating your vehicle - 1

This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your vehicle must be locked.

Press the closed padlock on the remote control.

This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the direction indicators will flash for around ten seconds.

Anti-theft protection

Electronic engine immobiliser

The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.

This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.

SERVICE

In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal

and a message in the screen.

In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 1

Keep safely, away from your vehicle, the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle.

Access

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 2

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 3

Starting the vehicle

Diagram showing a car key inserted into a car with three red arrows indicating parts of the key.

Insert the key in the ignition switch.
The system recognises the starting code.
Turn the key fully towards the dashboard to position 3 (Starting).
When the engine starts, release the key.

Switching the vehicle off

Immobilise the vehicle.
Turn the key fully towards you to position 1 (Stop).
Remove the key from the ignition switch.

A heavy object (key fob...), attached to the key and weighing down on its shaft in the ignition switch, could cause a malfunction.

Key left in the "Ignition on" position

On opening the driver's door, an alert message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, to remind you that the key is still in the ignition switch at position 1 (Stop).

If the key has been left in the ignition switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour.

To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 (Ignition on).

Fault with the remote

control

In the event of a malfunction with the remote control, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.

First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control.

DS 4 (2014) - control - 1

natural_image Diagram of a handheld device with a rotary knob and red directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Reinitialisation

Switch off the ignition and remove the ignition key.
Press the closed padlock immediately for a few seconds.
Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).
Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.

Changing the battery

Battery ref.: CR2032/3 volts.

SERVICE

If the battery is flat, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver at the two cutouts.
Lift off the cover.
Remove the flat battery from its location.
Fit the new battery into its location observing the original direction of fitment.
Clip the cover onto the casing.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 1

If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 2

Lost keys

Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal identification documents and if possible the key code label.

The CITROËN dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.

Remote control

The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.

Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.

No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.

As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short period.

In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - When purchasing a second-hand vehicle - 1

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.

Central locking control

This control allows the simultaneous locking or unlocking of the doors and boot from inside the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Central locking control - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a lock icon inside a device with control buttons, surrounded by abstract curved lines (no text or symbols)

Locking

Press this button to lock the vehicle.

The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.

DS 4 (2014) - Locking - 1

If one of the doors is open, central locking from the inside does not take place.

Unlocking

Press the button again to unlock the vehicle.

The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.

DS 4 (2014) - Unlocking - 1

If the vehicle is locked from the outside, this button is inactive.

In this case, use the remote control or the key to unlock the vehicle or pull an interior door handle to open a door.

Access

DS 4 (2014) - Unlocking - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Unlocking - 3

Anti-intrusion security

This system allows automatic simultaneous locking of the doors and boot as soon as the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

Operation

If one of the doors or the boot is open, the automatic central locking does not take place.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 1

This is signalled by the sound of the locks rebounding, accompanied by illumination of this symbol in the instrument panel, an audible signal and the display of an alert message.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 2

Carrying long and voluminous objects

If you want to drive with the boot open, you should press the central locking button to lock the doors. Otherwise, every time the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks will rebound and the alerts mentioned above will appear.

Pressing the central locking button unlocks the vehicle.

Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this locking is temporary.

+2s

Activation / Deactivation

You can activate or deactivate this function permanently.

With the ignition on, press this button until an audible signal starts and a corresponding message is displayed.

The state of the system stays in memory when switching off the ignition.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation / Deactivation - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Activation / Deactivation - 2

Alarm \*

System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring.

- exterior perimeter

The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door, the boot, the bonnet...

- interior volumetric

The system checks for any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment.

The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle.

- tilt

The system checks for any change in the attitude of the vehicle.

The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted, moved or knocked.

Self-protection function

The system checks for the putting out of service of its components.

The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central control or the siren wiring are put out of service or damaged.

DS 4 (2014) - Self-protection function - 1

For all work on the alarm system, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Locking the vehicle with full alarm system

OFF

Activation

Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. Press the locking button on the remote control. The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second.

After the locking button on the remote control is pressed, the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after a delay of 45 seconds.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation - 1

If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after a delay of 45 seconds at the same time as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.

Deactivation

Press the unlocking button on the remote control.

The alarm system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter monitoring only

Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as:

leaving a pet in the vehicle,

  • leaving a window partially open,
  • washing your vehicle,
  • changing a wheel,
  • having your vehicle towed,
  • transport by sea.

+ 2s OFF

Deactivation of the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring

Switch off the ignition.
Within ten seconds, press the button until the indicator lamp is on continuously.
Get out of the vehicle.
Press the locking button on the remote control immediately.

The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is activated: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation of the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring - 1

To be effective, this deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.

Reactivation of the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring

Press the unlocking button on the remote control to deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring.
Press the locking button on the remote control to activate all the monitoring functions.

The indicator lamp in the button again flashes once per second.

Triggering of the alarm

This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for thirty seconds.

The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession.

When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.

Failure of the remote control

To deactivate the monitoring functions:

F unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock,
open the door; the alarm is triggered,
switch on the ignition; the alarm stops; the indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Operating fault

When the ignition is switched on, fixed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault with the system.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm

Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.

Doors

Opening
DS 4 (2014) - Doors - 1

natural_image Diagram showing car interior components with red and gray parts, no text or symbols present

From outside

After unlocking the vehicle completely using the remote control or the key, pull the door handle.

DS 4 (2014) - From outside - 1

When the selective unlocking is activated, the first press of the remote control unlocking button permits unlocking of the driver's door only.

DS 4 (2014) - From outside - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car door with a red arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

From inside

Pull the interior control lever of a front door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.

DS 4 (2014) - From inside - 1

With the selective unlocking activated:

- opening the the driver's door unlocks the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not already been completely unlocked). - opening one of the passenger doors unlocks the rest of the vehicle.

Closing

When a door is not closed correctly:

DS 4 (2014) - Closing - 1

- when the engine is running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds,

- when the vehicle is moving (speed higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds.

Emergency control

System allowing the doors to be locked and unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction of the central locking system or battery failure.

Diagram showing two steps of a car seatbelt buckle adjustment, with red arrows indicating the direction of change.

Locking the driver's door

Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it to the rear.

You can also apply the procedure described for the passenger doors.

Unlocking the driver's door

Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it to the front.

Locking the front and rear passenger doors

Open the doors.
On the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on (see the corresponding section).
Remove the black cap, located on the edge of the door, using the key.
Insert the key in the socket without forcing it, then without turning it, move the latch sideways towards the inside of the door.
Remove the key and refit the cap.
Close the doors and check that the vehicle has locked correctly from the outside.

Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors

√ Pull the interior door opening control.

Boot

Opening

DS 4 (2014) - Opening - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car intake tray with red directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

After unlocking the boot or the vehicle using the remote control or the key, press the opening control, then raise the tailgate.

Closing Tailgate release

Lower the tailgate using the interior grab handle.
If necessary, press down on the tailgate to fully close it.

If the tailgate is not closed correctly:

DS 4 (2014) - Closing Tailgate release - 1

- when the engine is running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by the display of an alert message for a few seconds,

- when the vehicle is moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of an alert message for a few seconds.

DS 4 (2014) - Closing Tailgate release - 2

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical device with a lever and labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond labels)

System allowing the mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking system malfunction.

Unlocking

Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
Move the latch to the left.

Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked.

Electric windows

Fitted with a safety anti-pinch system.

Diagram showing two labeled components (① and ②) with directional arrows and icons, likely illustrating a process or system layout.

  1. Driver's electric window control.
  2. Passenger's electric window control.

One-touch electric windows

DS 4 (2014) - One-touch electric windows - 1

There are two options:

DS 4 (2014) - One-touch electric windows - 2

manual mode

Press or pull the control gently. The window stops when the control is released.

DS 4 (2014) - manual mode - 1

automatic mode

Press or pull the control firmly. The window opens or closes fully when the control is released.
Pressing the control again stops the movement of the window.

DS 4 (2014) - automatic mode - 1

The electric window controls remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off or until the vehicle is locked after a door is opened.

If the passenger's window cannot be operated from the driver's door control panel, carry out the operation from the passenger's door control panel, and vice versa.

DS 4 (2014) - automatic mode - 2

After approximately ten consecutive complete opening/closing movements of the window, a protection function is activated which only authorises closing of the window to prevent damage to the electric window motor.

Once the window is closed, the controls will become available again after approximately 40 minutes.

Access

DS 4 (2014) - automatic mode - 3

DS 4 (2014) - automatic mode - 4

Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and partially lowers again.

i

If the window cannot be closed (for example, in the presence of ice), once the window has lowered:

press and hold the control until the window opens fully,
then pull the control immediately and hold it until the window closes,
continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

Reinitialisation

If a window does not rise automatically, its operation must be reinitialised:

pull the control until the window stops,
release the control and pull it again until the window closes fully,
continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed,
press the control to lower the window automatically to the low position,
when the window has reached the low position, press the control again for approximately one second.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

!

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

If an obstacle is encountered during operation of the electric windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the control concerned.

When the driver operates the passenger's electric window control, they must ensure that nothing is preventing the windows closing correctly.

The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.

Be aware of children when operating the windows.

Fuel tank

Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.

Low fuel level

When the low fuel level in the tank is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and the display of an alert message. When it first comes on, around 6 litres of fuel remain in the tank.

Until sufficient fuel has been added, every time the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp appears, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message. When driving, this audible signal and the display of this alert message are repeated with increasing frequency, as the level drops towards 0. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out.

If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also to "Checks".

Refuelling

Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to be registered by the fuel gauge.

Opening the filler cap may result in an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal and results from the sealing of the fuel system.

DS 4 (2014) - Refuelling - 1

With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

Access

DS 4 (2014) - Refuelling - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Refuelling - 3

Diagram showing a car interior with a red arrow pointing to a car seatbelt icon labeled 'A'.

Press control A until the automatic opening of the fuel flap is heard.

This control remains active for a few minutes after switching off the ignition. If necessary, switch the ignition on again to reactivate it.

Take care to select the pump that delivers the correct fuel for your vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Refuelling - 5

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a rotating shaft and housing with a red curved arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Introduce the nozzle so as to push in the metal non-return flap B.
Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as far as possible before starting to refuel (risk of blowback).
Maintain this position while refuelling.
Push the fuel flap to close it.

If you are filling your tank to the top, do not persist after the third cut-off; this could cause your vehicle to malfunction.

The petrol or Diesel engine of your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.

For petrol engines, the use of unleaded fuel is compulsory.

The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded petrol nozzles only.

DS 4 (2014) - Refuelling - 6

If you have put in the wrong fuel for your vehicle, you must have the tank drained and refilled with the correct fuel before you start the engine.

Fuel supply cut-off

Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a collision.

Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines Quality of the fuel used for diesel engines

The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing 10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European standards EN 228 and EN 15376.

E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15293.

For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type).

The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards (Diesel fuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel engines; however, this use is subject to strict application of the special servicing conditions. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

The use of any other type of (bio)fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).

Misfuel prevention (Diesel) \*

Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.

Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.

Operation

DIESEL

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling.

Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type filler nozzle.

It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device and pour slowly.

i Travelling abroad

As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the CITROËN dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you want to travel.

Access

DS 4 (2014) - i Travelling abroad - 1

DS 4 (2014) - i Travelling abroad - 2

DS 4 (2014) - i Travelling abroad - 3

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

Visibility

DS 4 (2014) - Visibility - 1

natural_image Abstract line and symbol design with geometric shapes and colors (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car's rear taillight with red LED marking, showing Chinese text on the windshield and side panel.

DS 4 (2014) - Visibility - 3

Lighting controls

System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.

Main lighting

The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle are designed to adapt the driver's visibility progressively according to the climatic conditions:

  • sidelamps, to be seen,
  • dipped beam headlamps to see without dazzling other drivers,
  • main beam headlamps to see clearly when the road is clear.

Additional lighting

Other lamps are provided to meet the requirements of particular driving conditions:

  • rear foglamps,
  • front foglamps with cornering lighting,
  • directional headlamps for improved visibility when cornering,
  • daytime running lamps to be more visible during the day,
  • guide-me-home and welcome lighting to facilitate access to the vehicle,
  • parking lamps as vehicle position markers.

Programming

The setting of some functions can be adjusted:

  • daytime running lamps,
  • automatic illumination of headlamps,
  • guide-me-home lighting,
  • welcome lighting,
  • directional lighting.

DS 4 (2014) - Programming - 1

In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

Daytime running lamps

Daytime lighting, compulsory in certain countries, which comes on automatically when the engine is started making the vehicle more visible to other users.

This function is assured:

  • in countries where it is imposed by regulations,
    by illumination of the dipped beam headlamps associated with illumination of the sidelamps and number plate lamps; this function cannot be deactivated.
  • for other countries where it is provided, by illumination of dedicated lamps; this function can be activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

The lighting control must be in position "0" or "AUTO" (day mode).

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled controls and directional arrows, including points A and B.

Model without AUTO lighting

A B O2O3

Model with AUTO lighting

Manual controls

The lighting is controlled directly by the driver by means of the ring A and the stalk B.

A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it to position the symbol required facing the mark.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual controls - 1

Lighting off / daytime running lamps.

Sidelamps (lighting signature). Automatic illumination of headlamps. Sidelamps.

Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.

B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull the stalk towards you to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps. In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.

Displays

Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on.

OK C

Model with front and rear foglamps

C. Foglamp selection ring.

The foglamps operate with the dipped and main beam headlamps.

DS 4 (2014) - Displays - 2
front and rear foglamps

Rotate and release the ring C :

forwards a first time to switch on the front foglamps,
^CB forwards a second time to switch on the rear foglamps,
nearwards a first time to switch off the rear foglamps,
rearwards a second time to switch off the front foglamps.

When the headlamps switch off with automatic illumination of headlamps (AUTO model) or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on.

Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.

DS 4 (2014) - Displays - 3

In good or rainy weather, by both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamps are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or falling snow. In these weather conditions, you should switch on the foglamps and dipped beam headlamps manually, as the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light.

Do not forget to switch off the front and rear foglamps when they are no longer necessary.

DS 4 (2014) - Displays - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Displays - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Displays - 6

Switching off the lighting when switching off the ignition

When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps switch off immediately, except for the dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home lighting is activated.

Switching on the lighting when switching on the ignition

To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn the ring A to position "0" - lighting off, then to the position of your choice.

If the lighting is switched on manually after switching off the ignition, there is an audible signal when a front door is opened to warn the driver that they have forgotten to switch off the vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.

They switch off automatically after a period which depends on the state of charge of the battery (entry to energy economy mode).

Manual guide-me-home lighting

DS 4 (2014) - Manual guide-me-home lighting - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

The temporary illumination of the dipped beam headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.

Switching on

With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.
A further "headlamp flash" switches the function off.

Switching off

The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.

Parking lamps

DS 4 (2014) - Parking lamps - 1

natural_image Front view line drawing of a car's front grille and dashboard (no text or symbols)

AUTO AVOC AVOC

Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of the sidelamps on the traffic side only.

37 Within one minute of switching off the ignition, operate the lighting control stalk up or down depending on the traffic side (for example: when parking on the left; lighting control stalk upwards; the right hand sidelamps are on).

This is confirmed by an audible signal and illumination of the corresponding direction indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.

To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the central position.

Automatic illumination of headlamps

Diagram of a car dashboard with directional control buttons and a red arrow pointing to a circular component labeled 'A'

When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

Activation

Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The activation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message in the screen.

Deactivation

F Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message in the screen.

Operating fault

SERVICE In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning lamp is

displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Automatic "guide-me-home" lighting

When the automatic illumination of headlamps function is activated, under low ambient light the dipped beams headlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off.

Programming

DS 4 (2014) - Programming - 1

Activation or deactivation, as well as the duration of the guide-me-home lighting, is set in the vehicle configuration menu.

In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically.

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.

Welcome lighting

The remote switching on of the passenger compartment lighting makes your access to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated depending on the light level detected by the sunshine sensor.

DS 4 (2014) - Welcome lighting - 1

natural_image Illustration of a car with headlights on the wheel and a spotlight cone, no text or symbols present

Switching on
DS 4 (2014) - Welcome lighting - 2
Press the open padlock on the remote control; your vehicle is unlocked.
On the outside, the sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps, as well as the side spotlamps, located under the door mirrors, come on.

DS 4 (2014) - Welcome lighting - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

On the inside, the footwell and courtesy lamps come on.

Switching off

On the outside, the welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time, when the ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle. On the inside, the welcome lighting switches off automatically after a pre-determined time or on opening one of the doors.

Programming

DS 4 (2014) - Programming - 1
Activation or deactivation, as well as the duration of the lighting duration for the exterior welcome lighting can be set via the vehicle configuration menu.

Manual adjustment of halogen headlamps

Automatic adjustment of xenon headlar

Diagram showing a device panel with a red arrow pointing to a connector, likely indicating a diagnostic or safety feature.

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the height of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

  1. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.

-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
- Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
- Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.

AUTO

This system adjusts the height of the xenon headlamp beams automatically and when stationary, according to the load in the vehicle, so as to avoid causing a nuisance to other road user.

SERVICE

If a malfunction occurs, this

warning lamp is displayed in the

instrument panel, accompanied by

an audible signal and a message in the screen.

The system then places your headlamps in the lowest position.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 1

Do not touch the xenon bulbs.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 2

The initial setting is position "0".

Directional lighting

DS 4 (2014) - Directional lighting - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior panel with handle and seat (no text or symbols)

When the dipped or main beam headlamps are on, this function, allows the light beams to better follow the road.

The use of this function, coupled with the xenon headlamps and the cornering lighting, considerably improves the quality of your lighting round bends.

DS 4 (2014) - Directional lighting - 2

natural_image Top-down view of a car with visible exhaust plume and side-mounted vehicle (no text or symbols)

with directional lighting

DS 4 (2014) - Directional lighting - 3

natural_image Top-down view of two cars on a curved road with light trails, no visible text or symbols

without directional lighting

This function is inactive:

  • when stationary or at low speeds,
  • when reverse is engaged.

Programming

DS 4 (2014) - Programming - 1

The system is activated or deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu.

The system is activated by default.

The state of the system stays in memory on switching off the ignition.

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message in the screen.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Visibility

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 3

Cornering lighting

DS 4 (2014) - Cornering lighting - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car's front and side panels showing engine, grille, and dashboard components (no text or symbols)

With dipped or main beams, this function makes use of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approximately 40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road, intersections, parking manoevres...).

DS 4 (2014) - Cornering lighting - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car with airflow visualization, showing top-down and side-view views (no text or symbols)

with cornering lighting

DS 4 (2014) - Cornering lighting - 3

natural_image Diagram showing a car on a curved road with a highlighted light source, alongside an inset close-up of the car's side profile (no text or symbols)

without cornering lighting

Switching on

This function starts:

  • when the corresponding direction indicator is switched on, or
  • from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel.

Switching off

The system does not operate:

  • below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel,
  • above 25 mph (40 km/h),
  • when reverse gear is engaged.

Programming

DS 4 (2014) - Programming - 1

The system is activated or

deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu.

The system is activated by default.

Wiper controls

System for selection and control of the various front and rear wiping modes for the elimination of rain and cleaning the screens.

The vehicle's front and rear wipers are designed to improve the driver's visibility according to the climatic conditions.

The wipers are controlled by means of stalk A for the front and the ring B for the rear.

Programming

Various automatic wiper control modes are also available depending on whether the following options are fitted:

  • automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
  • rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.

Diagram showing car interior control panel with labeled buttons A and B and directional arrows indicating movement or movement.

Model without AUTO wiping

AUTO BAR

Windscreen wiper

A. Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position.

DS 4 (2014) - Windscreen wiper - 1

Fast wiping (heavy rain).

Normal wiping (moderate rain).

Intermittent wiping (proportional to the speed of the vehicle).

Park.

DS 4 (2014) - Windscreen wiper - 2

Single wipe (press downwards or pull the stalk briefly towards you, then release).

or

DS 4 (2014) - Windscreen wiper - 3

Automatic wiping (press down, then release).

Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).

Model with AUTO wiping

Visibility

DS 4 (2014) - Windscreen wiper - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Windscreen wiper - 5

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.

A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AUTO 0 AUTO

Switching on

Briefly push stalk A downwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching on - 1

The instruction is confirmed by a wiping cycle, accompanied by illumination of this warning lamp in the instrument panel and an activation message.

Switching off

Briefly push stalk A downwards again.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching off - 1

The instruction is confirmed by this warning lamp going off in the instrument panel and/or the display of a deactivation message.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching off - 2

The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers must be reactivated if the ignition has been off for more than one minute.

Operating fault

If an automatic rain sensitive wiper malfunction occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror.

Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

Windscreen and headlamp wash

3 1 0 AUTO

Windscreen wash

Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fixed period.

It operates only when the headlamps are off or the vehicle is stationary.

DS 4 (2014) - Windscreen wash - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing the intake manifold and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Headlamp wash

Associated with the windscreen wash, the headlamp washers operate with the vehicle moving, when the dipped or main beam headlamps are on.

DS 4 (2014) - Headlamp wash - 1

To reduce the consumption of the fluid by the headlamp washers, they operate only with every seventh use of the screenwash or every 25 miles (40 km) during a given journey.

Low screenwash / headlamp wash fluid level

On vehicle fitted with headlamp washers, the low level of this fluid is indicated by gauge in the reservoir filler neck under the bonnet.

Checking and topping up this fluid can should be done with the engine off.

DS 4 (2014) - Low screenwash / headlamp wash fluid level - 1

The level of this fluid should be checked regularly, particularly during winter.

Refer to "Checks - Screenwash / headlamp wash level" section for the procedure on checking the level.

Special position of the windscreen wipers

DS 4 (2014) - Special position of the windscreen wipers - 1

natural_image Diagram of car dashboard with red directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades.

It is used for cleaning or replacement of the blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to detach the blades from the windscreen.

Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute after switching off the ignition places the blades vertically on the screen.

To park the blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.

DS 4 (2014) - Special position of the windscreen wipers - 2

To maintain the effectiveness of the "flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is advisable to:

  • handle them with care,
  • clean them regularly using soapy water,
  • avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen,
  • replace them at the first signs of wear.

Rear wiper

Diagram of a car interior with labeled controls and a red arrow pointing to component B

B. Rear wiper selection ring: turn the ring to place the desired symbol against the marking.

DS 4 (2014) - Rear wiper - 2

Park.

Intermittent wipe.

Wash-wipe.

Turn the ring to its stop/the rear screen wash, then the rear wiper operates for a set duration.

DS 4 (2014) - Rear wiper - 3

If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a tailgate bicycle carrier, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the vehicle configuration menu.

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.

Programming

DS 4 (2014) - Programming - 1

The function is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

This function is activated by default.

Courtesy lamps

Front and rear courtesy lamps

Diagram of a car air conditioner panel with labeled buttons and indicators

Diagram of a car air conditioner front panel with labeled buttons and display screen

  1. Front courtesy lamp
  2. Front map reading lamps
  3. Rear courtesy lamp
  4. Rear map reading lamps

DS 4 (2014) - Front and rear courtesy lamps - 3

In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:

  • when the vehicle is unlocked,
  • when the key is removed from the ignition,
  • on opening a door,
  • when the remote control locking button is used to locate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually:

  • when the vehicle is locked,
  • when the ignition is switched on,
  • 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

DS 4 (2014) - Front and rear courtesy lamps - 4

Permanently off.

DS 4 (2014) - Front and rear courtesy lamps - 5

Permanent lighting.

DS 4 (2014) - Front and rear courtesy lamps - 6

In permanent lighting mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances:

  • with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes,
  • in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,
  • with the engine running, unlimited. When the courtesy lamp is in the

"permanent lighting" position, the rear courtesy lamp also comes on, except if it is in the "permanently off" position.

To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it in the the "permanently off" position.

Front and rear map reading lamps

DS 4 (2014) - Front and rear map reading lamps - 1

With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.

DS 4 (2014) - Front and rear map reading lamps - 2

Take care not to put anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.

Interior mood lighting

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

Switching on Switching off
Automotive dashboard interface with control panels, display screens, and navigation controls

At night, the audio system and digital air conditioning illumination, together with the illumination of the central dashboard storage box, comes on automatically when the sidelamps are on.

DS 4 (2014) - Interior mood lighting - 2

natural_image Pure technical line drawing of a mechanical component without any text, numbers, or symbols

On certain versions, three LEDs, located in the rail linking the rear view mirror to the roof come on as well.

2/16 G° G° 1 000

The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.
It can be switched off manually by adjusting the instrument panel lighting dimmer button to one of the lowest settings.

Boot lamp

DS 4 (2014) - Boot lamp - 1

natural_image Architectural line drawing of a building interior with windows and roof (no text or symbols)

This comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes off automatically when the boot is closed.

DS 4 (2014) - Boot lamp - 2

The lighting time varies according to the circumstances:

  • when the ignition is off, approximately ten minutes,
  • in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,
  • when the engine is running, no limit.

Visibility

DS 4 (2014) - Boot lamp - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Boot lamp - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Boot lamp - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Boot lamp - 6

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

Fittings

DS 4 (2014) - Fittings - 1

natural_image Abstract line and symbol design with geometric shapes and colors (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Fittings - 2

natural_image Interior view of a modern car showing the dashboard, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Fittings - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and side panels (no visible text or symbols)

Interior fi ttings

  1. Sun visor

(see "Familiarisation - § Panoramic windscreen")

  1. Ticket/card holder

  2. Illuminated glove box

(see details on a following page)

  1. Door pockets

  2. USB port/Auxiliary socket

(see details on a following page)

  1. Cigar lighter/12 V accessory socket

(see details on following pages)

  1. Portable ashtray

(see details on following pages)

  1. Centre armrest with storage

(see details on a following page)

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification and assembly reference.

Illuminated glove Portable ashtray

box

Diagram of a vehicle's front panel with labeled parts A and B, showing structural components and directional indicators.

It has dedicated locations for storing a water bottle, the vehicle's handbook pack...

Its lid has locations for storing a pen, a pair of glasses, tokens, maps, a cup...

To open the glove box, raise the handle. It is lit when the lid is opened.

It houses the front passenger airbag deactivation switch A.

If the vehicle is fitted with air conditioning, it provides access to the ventilation nozzle B, distributing the same conditioned air as the vents in the passenger compartment.

DS 4 (2014) - box - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing the dashboard and seat area (no text or symbols)

√ Pull the cover to open the ashtray.
To empty it, remove the ashtray by pulling it upwards.

DS 4 (2014) - box - 3

To avoid any problem of interference or risk of overturning, do not place the ashtray near the gear lever.

Cigarette lighter/12 V accessory socket socket

USB port / auxiliary

DS 4 (2014) - USB port / auxiliary - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with a red pointer and a circular dial indicator (no text or symbols)

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in and wait a few seconds until it pops out automatically.
To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and connect a suitable adaptor.

You can use this socket to connect a telephone charger, a bottle warmer...

After use, put the cigarette lighter back into place straight away.

DS 4 (2014) - USB port / auxiliary - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a red arrow pointing to a circular feature (no text or symbols)

The "AUX" connection box, located in the centre console, comprises an auxiliary JACK socket and/or a USB port.

It permits the connection of a portable device, such as a digital audio player of the iPod ^® or USB memory stick type.

It reads certain audio file formats allowing them to be heard via the vehicle's speakers.

You can manage these files using the steering mounted controls or the audio system control panel and display them on the multifunction screen.

i Connected to the USB port, the portable device charges automatically while in use.

For more information on the use of this equipment, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.

DS 4 (2014) - USB port / auxiliary - 3

Semi-raised centre console

  1. Front armrest
    (see details on following pages)
  2. Open storage
  3. Cup holder
  4. Storage pocket

Diagram of a device with numbered buttons labeled 1, 2, and 3, likely indicating status or function areas.

Diagram of car interior showing two labeled parts (3 and 4) with numbered annotations pointing to the dashboard.

Raised centre console

  1. Front armrest
    (see details on following pages)
  2. 12 V accessory socket
    (see details on following pages)
  3. Storage box
  4. Cup holder/Bottle holder
  5. Storage pocket
  6. Large multifunctional storage unit (see details on following pages)

Diagram of a device with numbered components, likely for labeling or assembly reference.

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch mechanism with numbered parts and directional arrows

Large multifunctional storage unit

Diagram of a car interior with numbered labels pointing to the dashboard panel

This storage unit is closed by a sliding shutter. It contains:

  • the USB port and 12 V/auxiliary sockets 1,
  • a retractable support 2 to receive your mobile phone or portable device,
  • a space ventilated by a closeable nozzle 3, to keep food and drinks fresh if the air conditioning is operating.

It is illuminated only when the sliding shutter is fully open. The sliding shutter can be partly closed up to the level of the retractable support, so as to keep the storage unit cool.

Front armrest

Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.

The height and length of the armrest cover can be adjusted.

Height adjustment
DS 4 (2014) - Front armrest - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Raise the cover to the required position (low, intermediate or high).
If you raise the cover slightly beyond the high position, guide it when lowering it to the low position.

Longitudinal adjustment
DS 4 (2014) - Front armrest - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted red triangular component (no text or symbols)

Slide the cover fully forwards or rearwards.

Storage
DS 4 (2014) - Front armrest - 3

natural_image Diagram of a car intake manifold with red directional arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

The storage space in the armrest can hold up to 6 CDs.

This storage space may be fitted with a 230 V/50 Hz socket.

Raise the lever.
Raise the cover fully.

Front armrest

Comfort and storage device for the driver and front passenger.

The length of the armrest cover can be adjusted.

Longitudinal adjustment
DS 4 (2014) - Front armrest - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

To move forwards, raise the lever. The armrest slides forwards to its stop.

To stow it, slide it fully back and press down to lock it.

Storage
DS 4 (2014) - Front armrest - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car showing a smartphone seat with red directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

The armrest's compartment can hold up to 6 CDs.

Raise the cover fully.

230 V/50 Hz power socket

AC230V 50Hz 120W

A 230 V/50 Hz socket (maximum power: 120 W) is fitted to the centre console.

To use the socket:

lift the front armrest cover for access to its compartment,
check that the warning lamp is on green,
connect your multimedia or other electrical device (telephone charger, laptop computer, CD-DVD player, baby food warmer...).

This socket works with the engine running, as well as in STOP mode on Stop & Start.

In the event of a fault with the socket, the green warning lamp flashes.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Connect only one device at a time to the socket (no extension or multi-way connector).

Connect only devices with class II insulation (shown on the device).

As a safety measure, when electrical consumption is high and when required by the vehicle's electrical system (particular weather conditions, electrical overload...), the current supply to the socket will be cut off; the green warning lamp goes off.

Fittings

DS 4 (2014) - V/50 Hz power socket - 2

DS 4 (2014) - V/50 Hz power socket - 3

12 V accessory socket

12V

To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 W), lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.

Mats

Removable carpet protection.

Fitting
DS 4 (2014) - Mats - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a vehicle's rear window with red arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached.

The other mats are simply placed on the carpet.

Removal

To remove the mat on the driver's side:

move the seat as far back as possible,
unclip the fixings,
remove the mat.

Refitting

To refit the mat on the driver's side:

position the mat correctly,
refit the fixings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured correctly.

DS 4 (2014) - Refitting - 1

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

  • only use mats which are suited to the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used,
  • never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by CITROËN may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control/speed limiter.

Storage drawers

Located under each front seat, except for the driver's seat on versions with electric seat.

Opening
DS 4 (2014) - Storage drawers - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Raise the front of the drawer and pull it open.

DS 4 (2014) - Storage drawers - 2

Do not place heavy objects in the drawer.

Removal

Avoid removing the drawer completely, as refitting it is not easy.

Open the drawer fully.

Pull the drawer upwards to disengage it.

Refitting

However, if it has been completely removed, to refit it:

use the torch to illuminate the area under the seat.

engage the drawer in its runners,

lift the retaining tongues and slide the drawer under these tongues,

at the end of its travel, press down on the drawer to engage it.

Fittings

DS 4 (2014) - Refitting - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Refitting - 2

Rear armrest

Comfort system for the rear passengers.

DS 4 (2014) - Rear armrest - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt and door, with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)
  • Lower the rear armrest for a more comfortable position.
    This also gives access to the ski flap.

Ski fl ap

Arrangement for storing and transporting long objects.

Opening
DS 4 (2014) - Ski fl ap - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing a device being inserted into a seat, with a red arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present)

F Lower the rear armrest.
Pull the flap handle downwards.
Lower the flap.
Load the objects from inside the boot.

Boot fittings

  1. Rear parcel shelf
    (see details on a following page)
  2. Hooks
    (see details on a following page)
  3. 12 V accessory socket
    (see details on a following page)
  4. Torch
    (see details on following pages)
  5. Lashing rings
  6. Storage box
    (see details on following pages)
  7. Retaining strap
  8. Storage net

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

Fittings

DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 3

Rear parcel shelf
DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 4

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car backrest with a covered seat area (no text or symbols)

To remove the shelf:
unhook the two cords,
raise the shelf slightly, then remove it.
There are several options for storing the shelf:
- either upright behind the front seats,
- or flat at the base of the boot.

Hooks
DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 5

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a red arrow pointing to the vent (no text or symbols present)

The hooks can be used to secure shopping bags.

DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 6

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car interior with a red arrow pointing to a vertical pole (no text or symbols)

Access to the storage box

DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 7
An additional hook under the shelf is used to hold up the boot floor using its cord, to facilitate access to the tools and spare wheel or the temporary puncture repair kit...

12 V accessory socket
DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 8

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and air vent with a red arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 W), remove the cap and connect an appropriate adaptor.
Turn the key to the ignition on position.

Torch
DS 4 (2014) - Boot fittings - 9

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing the backrest and air vent with a red arrow pointing to the vent (no text or symbols)

This is a removable lamp, fitted in the boot wall, which can be used to light the boot or as a torch.

For the boot lamp function, refer to the "Visibility - § Boot lamp" section.

Operation

This torch operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.

It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes and charges while you are driving.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 1

Observe the polarities when fitting the rechargeable batteries.

Never replace the rechargeable batteries with normal disposable batteries.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 2

natural_image Two gray cylindrical devices with handles, one upright and one tilted (no text or symbols visible)

Use

Extract the torch from its location pulling it upwards.
Press the switch, located on the back, to switch the torch on or off.
√ Unfold the support, located on the back, to set down and raise the torch; for example, when changing a wheel.

Storing

Put the torch back in place in its location starting with the lower part.
If you have forgotten to switch off the torch, this switches it off automatically.

DS 4 (2014) - Storing - 1

It the torch is not engaged correctly, it may not charge and may not come on when the boot is opened.

Storage box
DS 4 (2014) - Storing - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car trunk with a lid and ventilation cover, showing no text or symbols

Raise the boot carpet for access to the storage box.

This has areas for the storage of a box of spare bulbs, a first aid kit, two warning triangles... It also contains the vehicle tools, the temporary puncture repair kit...

Fittings

DS 4 (2014) - Storing - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Storing - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Storing - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Storing - 6

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

Child safety

DS 4 (2014) - Child safety - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Child safety - 2

natural_image Close-up of a car grille featuring glossy black and metallic car trim (no visible text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Child safety - 3

General points relating to child seats

Although one of CITROËN main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations:

  • in accordance with European regulations, all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings *,
  • statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats,
  • a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the "rearwards-facing" position both in the front and in the rear.

DS 4 (2014) - General points relating to child seats - 1

CITROËN recommends that children

should travel on the rear seats of your vehicle:

  • "rearward-facing" up to the age of 3,
  • "forward-facing" over the age of 3.

DS 4 (2014) - General points relating to child seats - 2

Child seat in the front \*

OFF ON Passenger AIRBAG PULLION AIRBAG OFF

"Rearward-facing"

When a "rearward-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the intermediate longitudinal and highest position, with the backrest straightened.

The passenger airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to inflate.

OFF ON Passenger Airbag AIRBAG ON

"Forward-facing"

When a "forward-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal and highest position with seat backrest straightened and leave the passenger's airbag activated.

DS 4 (2014) - "Forward-facing" - 1

Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned.

For child seats with a support leg, ensure that the support leg is in stable contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the passenger seat.

DS 4 (2014) - "Forward-facing" - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car seat assembly with measurement arrows (no text or symbols)

Passenger seat adjusted to the intermediate longitudinal and highest position.

* Refer to the current legislation in your country before installing a child seat on this seat.

Deactivating the passenger's airbag

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 1

Never install a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.

The warning label present on both sides of the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In line with current legislation, the following two pages contain this warning in all of the languages required.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 2
Passenger airbag OFF

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 3

AIRBAG
DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 7

For information on deactivating the airbag, refer to the "Airbags" section.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 8

natural_image Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with red directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 9

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivating the passenger's airbag - 10

ARلاجلاع الطالع الوجه بالجاء الوراه على مقد سياره مجهز ووسادة آمان هوائية أsemanticة مفظة. فقد يودي هنا إلى التسب بموت الطال أو在一ipsابات خطيرة لديه.
BGНИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това можеда причини СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CSNIKDY neumist'ujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DABrug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Død eller alvorlig skade på barnet kan forekomme.
DEVerwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE VERLETZUNGEN können die Folge sein.
ELΜη χρησιμοτοιείτε ПОТЕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του autokivňτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Autó μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
ENNEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur
ESNO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIÓN PARA NIÑOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIÓN SOBRE UN ASIENTO PROTEGIDO CON UN COJÍN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE O HERIRLO GRAVEMENTE.
ETÄrge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sõidusuunas söiduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See võib põhjustada lapsele RASKEID VIGASTUSI või SURMA.
FIÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FRNE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVE.Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HRNIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HUSOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést olyan ülésen, amely AKTIVÁLT ÁLLAPOTÚ (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLĘGZSAKKAL van védve. Ez a gyermek halálat vagy súlyos sérülését okozhatja.
ITNON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LTNIEKADA nejrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonés su atgal atgrežtu vaiku ant sédynés, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinés ORO PAGALVÉS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvel vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LVNAV PIEŁAUJAMS uzstādīt uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasażiera vietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĘTS priekšējais DROŚĪBAS GAISA SPILVENS.Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MTQatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NLPlaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan het KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.
NOInstaller ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, BARNET risikerer à bli DREPT eller HÄRDT SKADET.
PLNIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji «tyłem do kierunku jazdy»na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWA PODUSZKE POWIETRZNA w stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko narażone będzie na ŚMIERC lub BARDZO POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA CIAŁA w momenicie wyzwolenia poduszki powietrznej
PTNUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RONu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RUBO BCEX СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье, защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SKNIKDY nepoužívajte na prednom sedadle chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM detské zadržiavacie zariadenie umiestnené v proti smere jazdy. Môže to spôsobit’ SMRT, alebo VÁŽNE ZRANENIE DIETATA.
SLNIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, će je VARNOŠTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestítev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SRNIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštícenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SVAnvänd ALDRIG en bakàtvänd barnstol i ett säte skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framför det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DÖDLIGA skador på barnet.
TRKESĪNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTĪF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESĪNE veya ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.

Child seat at the rear

"Rearward facing"

When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forwards and straighten the backrest so that the "rearward facing" child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat.

"Forward facing"

When a "forward facing" child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forwards and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the "forward facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat.

Child safety

DS 4 (2014) - "Forward facing" - 1

DS 4 (2014) - "Forward facing" - 2

Centre rear seat

A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat.

DS 4 (2014) - Centre rear seat - 1

Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tightened. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that the support leg is in stable contact with the floor.

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kgGroups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
DS 4 (2014) - Child seats recommended by CITROËN - 1L1"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"Installed in the rearwards-facing position.DS 4 (2014) - Child seats recommended by CITROËN - 2L2"KIDDY Comfort Pro"The impact shield must be used for carrying young children (from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
DS 4 (2014) - Child seats recommended by CITROËN - 3L4"KLIPPAN Optima"From approximately 6 years (from 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
DS 4 (2014) - Child seats recommended by CITROËN - 4L5"RÖMER KIDFIX"Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.The child is restrained by the seat belt.

DS 4 (2014) - Child seats recommended by CITROËN - 5

Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

SeatWeight of the child / indicative age
Less than 13 kg(groups 0 (b) and 0+)Up to ≈ 1 yearFrom 9 to 18 kg(group 1)From 1 to ≈ 3 yearsFrom 15 to 25 kg(group 2)From 3 to ≈ 6 yearsFrom 22 to 36 kg(group 3)From 6 to ≈ 10 years
Front passenger seat (c)
- fixed - height adjustableDS 4 (2014) - Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt - 1U(R1)U(R2)U(R1)U(R2)U(R1)U(R2)U(R1)U(R2)
Outer rear seats (d)DS 4 (2014) - Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt - 2UUUU
Centre rear seat (d)DS 4 (2014) - Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt - 3XXXX

(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
(d) To install a child seat at the rear, backward or forward facing, move the front seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough room for the child seat and the child's legs.

U: seating position suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved "rearward facing" and/or "forward facing".

U(R1): identical to U, with the vehicle's seat backrest inclined fully forwards.

U(R2): identical to U, with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position.

X : seating position not suitable for installing a child seat for the weight group indicated.

DS 4 (2014) - Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt - 4

Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

"ISOFIX" mountings

Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulation.

The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:

DS 4 (2014) - "ISOFIX" mountings - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car showing four seats and three rear seats with red arrows indicating directions (no text or symbols)

There are three rings for each seat:

- two rings A, located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a marking,

ISOFIX ↓ A A

- a ring B behind the seat and identified by a marking, referred to as the Top Tether for fixing the upper strap.

TOP TETHER B B

This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle.

The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are secured on the two rings A. Some seats also have an upper strap, known as the Top Tether, which is attached to ring B.

To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER :

- remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on the seat (refit it once the child seat has been removed),

Child safety

DS 4 (2014) - "ISOFIX" mountings - 4

DS 4 (2014) - "ISOFIX" mountings - 5

  • pass the upper strap of the child seat behind the seat backrest, between the apertures for the head restraint rods,
  • fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B,
  • tighten the upper strap.

DS 4 (2014) - "ISOFIX" mountings - 6

When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left hand rear seat, before fitting the seat, first move the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering with the operation of the seat belt.

DS 4 (2014) - "ISOFIX" mountings - 7

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

Follow strictly the fitting instructions provided by with the child seat.

For information regarding the ISOFIX child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, refer to the table showing the locations for installing ISOFIX child seats.

ISOFIX child seat with TOP TETHER
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX(size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
DS 4 (2014) - ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and approved your vehicle - 1Installed only in the "forward-facing" position.Is attached to the rings A, as well as the ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.

DS 4 (2014) - ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and approved your vehicle - 2

This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.

In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.

DS 4 (2014) - ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and approved your vehicle - 3

Locations for ISOFIX child seats

In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.

In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of the child /indicative age
Less than 10 kg (group 0) Up to approx. 6 monthsLess than 10 kg (group 0) Less than 13 kg (group 0+) Up to approx. 1 yearFrom 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seatInfant car seat*"rear facing""rear facing""forward facing"
ISOFIX size categoryFGCDECDABB1
ISOFIX child seats universal and semi-universal which can be installed on the rear outer seatsIL-SU**IL-SUIL-SUIUF IL-SU

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, "Forward facing" secured using the upper strap.

IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:

- "rear facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg,

- "forward facing" fitted with a support leg,

- an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.

For advice on securing of the upper strap, refer to the paragraph "ISOFIX mountings".

* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.

** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured on the lower rings of a vehicle ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.

DS 4 (2014) - Locations for ISOFIX child seats - 1

Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with a backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

Advice on child seats

DS 4 (2014) - Advice on child seats - 1

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt buckle under the child seat, as this could destabilise it.

Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack relative to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys.

When installing a child seat using the seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.

At rear seating positions, always leave sufficient space between the front seat and:

- a "rearwards facing" child seat,

- the child's feet for a child seat fitted "forwards facing".

To do this, move the front seat forwards and, if necessary, move its backrest into the upright position.

For optimum installation of the "forward-facing" child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible.

You mst remove the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest to a passenger seat.

Ensure that the head restraint is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed.

Children at the front

The legislation on carrying children on the front passenger seat is specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.

Deactivate the passenger airbag when a "rearward-facing" child seat is installed on the front seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to inflate.

Installing a booster seat

The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs.

CITROËN recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

  • a child or children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle,
  • a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,
  • the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock".

Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third.

To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.

DS 4 (2014) - Installing a booster seat - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Installing a booster seat - 2

Manual child lock

Mechanical system to prevent opening of the rear door using its interior control.

The control, red in colour, is located on the edge of each rear door. It is identified by a symbol marked on the bodywork

Diagram illustrating car safety perception with labeled components and red arrows indicating detection zones

Locking

Using the ignition key, turn the red control as far as it will go:

  • to the left on the left-hand rear door,
  • to the right on the right-hand rear door.

Unlocking

Using the ignition key, turn the red control as far as it will go:

  • to the right on the left-hand rear door,
  • to the left on the right-hand rear door.

Diagram showing a car door with a red cross mark and a green checkmark indicating selection or confirmation.

DS 4 (2014) - Unlocking - 2

Do not confuse the child lock control, which is red, with the back-up locking control, which is black.

Safety

DS 4 (2014) - Safety - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Safety - 2

natural_image Close-up of a white electric car wheel rim and headlight (no visible text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Safety - 3

Direction indicators

Hazard warning lamp

110 130 ← STOP → CITROEN AUTO #0-0# 110 130 ← STOP → CITROEN

Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance.
Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance.

DS 4 (2014) - Hazard warning lamp - 2

If you forget to cancel the direction indicators for more than twenty seconds, the volume of the audible signal will increase if the speed is above 40 mph (60 km/h).

Three fl ashes of the direction indicators

Press briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will flash 3 times.

3 6 SETUP AUTO

A visual warning by means of the direction indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

Press this button, the direction indicators flash.

They can operate with the ignition off.

Horn

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps

When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically.

They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate.

You can also switch them off by pressing the button.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car's steering wheel and dashboard with red directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Audible warning system to alert other road users to an imminent danger.

Press the central part of the multifunction steering wheel.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps - 2

Use the horn moderately and only in the following circumstances:

  • immediate danger,
  • overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
  • approaching a location lacking visibility.

Emergency or assistance call

SOS High/Normal

This system allows you to make an emergency or assistance call to the emergency services or to the dedicated CITROËN service.

For more information on the use of this function, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.

Braking assistance systems

Group of supplementary systems which help you to obtain optimum braking in complete safety in emergency situations:

  • anti-lock braking system (ABS),
  • electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
  • emergency braking assistance (EBA).

Anti-lock braking system and electronic brake force distribution

Linked systems which improve the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking, in particular on poor or slippery surfaces.

Activation

The anti-lock braking system comes into operation automatically when there is a risk of wheel lock.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibration of the brake pedal.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation - 1

When braking in an emergency, press very firmly without releasing the pressure.

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, it

indicates a malfunction of the anti-lock braking system which could result in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

If this warning lamp comes on, together with the STOP and ABS

warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, it indicates a malfunction of the electronic brake force distribution which could result in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 3

When replacing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that they conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Trajectory control systems (ESP)

Emergency braking assistance and anti-slip regulation (ASR) which, in an emergency, enables you the optimum braking pressure more and electronic stability control (ESC)

System which, in an emergency, enables you to obtain the optimum braking pressure more quickly, thus reducing the stopping distance.

Activation

It is triggered by the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed.

The effect of this is a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in braking efficiency.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation - 1

When braking in an emergency, press firmly without releasing the pressure.

The anti-slip regulation (also known as traction control) optimises traction to prevent skidding of the wheels, by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine.

The electronic stability control acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to keep the vehicle on the trajectory required by the driver, within the limits of the laws of physics.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation - 2

The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion.

Intelligent traction control system ("Snow motion")

Your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: intelligent traction control.

This system detects situations of difficult surface adhesion that could make it difficult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow.

In these situations, the intelligent traction control limits the amount of wheel slip to provide the best traction and trajectory control for your vehicle.

In extremely severe conditions (deep snow, mud, ...), when it proves impossible to move off, it may be useful to temporarily deactivate the ESP/ASR systems to allow the wheels to spin freely and so allow movement of the vehicle.

Activation

These systems are activated automatically each time the vehicle is started.

They come into operation in the event of a grip or trajectory problem.

DS 4 (2014) - Activation - 1

This is indicated by flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.

Diagram of car interior with a red directional arrow and a numbered indicator box labeled '2#D'

Deactivation

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), if you are unable to make progress, it may be advisable to temporarily deactivate these systems, so that the wheels can spin freely and allow the vehicle to move.

Press the "ESP OFF" button, located near the steering wheel.

If the indicator lamp in the button comes on, this indicates that these systems are deactivated.

It is recommended that the systems be reactivated as soon as possible.

Reactivation

These systems are reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h).

Press the "ESP OFF" button again to reactivate them manually.

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

If this warning lamp in the instrument panel and the "ESP OFF" indicator lamp in the button come on, accompanied by an audible signal and

a message in the screen, this indicates a fault with these systems.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

The trajectory control systems offer increased safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.

The correct functioning of these systems is assured provided that manufacturer's recommendations are observed on:

  • wheels (tyres and rims),
  • braking components,
  • electronic components,
  • assembly and repair procedures.

After an impact, have these systems checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Seat belts

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.

Fastening

Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening

Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle with red directional arrows indicating movement or force, labeled with letter A and directional arrows.

Height adjustment

To lower the attachment point, squeeze the control A and slide it downwards.
To raise the attachment point, slide the control A upwards.

Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel

DS 4 (2014) - Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel - 1

When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel if the driver and/

or the front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal of increasing volume. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.

Safety

DS 4 (2014) - Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel - 3

Rear seat belts

HARRIENDER AIRBAG ON OFF

Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamps display

  1. Driver's seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp.
  2. Front passenger's seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp.

The corresponding warning lamp 1 or 2 comes on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, if the seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened.

DS 4 (2014) - Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamps display - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seatbelt frame with no text or symbols

The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point seat belt, with force limiter and, for the outer seats, an effort limiter.

Fastening

Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening

Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
On the outer seat belts, raise the bar to the top of the backrest to prevent the tongue from knocking against the side trim.

AIRBAG ON OFF

Seat belt unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel

DS 4 (2014) - Seat belt unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel - 1

This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel when one or more rear passengers unfasten their seat belt.

From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), this warning lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal of increasing volume. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the one or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.

Seat belt unfastened warning lamps display

  1. Right hand rear seat belt warning lamp.
  2. Centre rear seat belt warning lamp.
  3. Left hand rear seat belt warning lamp.

When the ignition is switched on, with the engine running or when the vehicle is moving at less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamps 3, 4 and 5 come on in red for approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not fastened.

When the vehicle is moving at more than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamps 3, 4 and 5 come on in red, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, if a rear passenger has unfastened their seat belt.

DS 4 (2014) - Seat belt unfastened warning lamps display - 1

The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all restrained securely before setting off.

Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys.

Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfil their role fully.

The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use.

Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly.

The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.

The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.

The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling firmly on the strap and releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must:

  • be tightened as close to the body as possible,
  • be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it does not twist,
  • be used to restrain only one person,
  • not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
  • not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance.

In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle, go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

Have your seat belts checked regularly by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage.

Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN dealers.

After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres.

Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person.

Never allow a child to travel on your lap.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on.

Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Airbags

System designed to maximise the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the force-limiting seat belts (with the exception of the centre rear passenger).

If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:

  • in the case of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,
  • in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations.

A B B

Impact detection zones

A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.

Deployment of the airbag(s) is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation.

The noise of the detonation may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

Safety

DS 4 (2014) - Impact detection zones - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Impact detection zones - 2

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.

Front airbags

DS 4 (2014) - Front airbags - 1

natural_image Two identical diagrams of a human head with internal oval patterns, no text or symbols present

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax.

The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Deployment

The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle.

The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.

DS 4 (2014) - Deployment - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism showing red belt and blue buttons (no text or symbols)

Deactivation

Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated:

insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch,
turn it to the "OFF" position,
then, remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation - 1

According to version, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and/or in the seat belt and

passenger's front airbag warning lamps display when the ignition is on and until the airbag is reactivated.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation - 2

To assure the safety of your child, the passenger's front airbag must be deactivated when you install a "rear facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

Reactivation

When you remove the child seat, turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.

DS 4 (2014) - Reactivation - 1

With the ignition on, this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display for approximately one minute, if the passenger's front airbag is activated.

Safety

DS 4 (2014) - Reactivation - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Reactivation - 3

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

Lateral airbags
AIRBAG

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the hip and the shoulder.

Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, door side.

A B B

Impact detection

Deployment

The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel.

A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.

Curtain airbags

System which protects the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head.

Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.

Deployment

The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message

in the screen, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be deployed.

In the event of a rear or front collision, the airbag is not deployed.

!

For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.

Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the airbags or injure the occupants.

After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked.

All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

Front airbags

Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.

If possible, do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.

Lateral airbags

Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a CITROËN dealer (see "Practical information - § Accessories").

Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.

Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.

Curtain airbags

Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed.

If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.

193 Safety
DS 4 (2014) - Curtain airbags - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Curtain airbags - 2

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

Driving

DS 4 (2014) - Driving - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Driving - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car gear shift lever with beige mesh and metallic hub (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - Driving - 3

Electric parking brake

(P)

The electric parking brake combines

2 operational modes:

- Automatic Application/Release

Application is automatic when the engine stops, release is automatic on use of the accelerator (activated by default),

- Manual Application/Release

The parking brake can be applied / released manually by pulling control lever A.

Programming the mode

Depending on the country of sale of the vehicle, the automatic application when the engine is switched off and the automatic release when you press the accelerator can be deactivated.

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the mode - 1

Activation / deactivation is done using the vehicle configuration menu; refer to the section covering the configuration of your vehicle's systems.

The parking brake is then applied and released manually. When the driver's door is opened, there is an audible signal and a message is displayed if the brake is not applied.

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the mode - 2

It is recommended that you do not apply the parking brake in very cold conditions (ice) and during towing (breakdown, caravan...). Deactivate the automatic functions and release the parking brake manually.

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the mode - 3

Do not place any object (packet of cigarettes, telephone...) between the gear lever and the electric parking brake control lever.

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the mode - 4

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, the automatic mode is deactivated.

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the mode - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Programming the mode - 6

Manual application

With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking brake whether the engine is running or off, pull control lever A.

The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

DS 4 (2014) - Manual application - 1

  • illumination of the braking warning lamp and of the P warning lamp in the control lever A,
  • display of the message "Parking brake on".

DS 4 (2014) - Manual application - 2

When the driver's door is opened with the engine running, a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal if the parking brake has not been applied, except in the case of an automatic gearbox with the gear lever in position P.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual application - 3

Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on fixed, not flashing.

Manual release

With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake, press on the brake pedal or the accelerator, pull then release control A.

The full application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

DS 4 (2014) - Manual release - 1

  • the braking warning lamp and the P warning lamp in the control lever A going off,
  • display of the message "Parking brake off".

DS 4 (2014) - Manual release - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Manual release - 3

If you pull control lever A without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and a warning lamp will come on in the instrument panel.

Maximum application

If necessary, you can make a maximum application of the parking brake. This is obtained by means of a long pull on the control lever A, until you see the message "Parking brake on maximum" and a beep is heard.

Maximum application is essential:

  • in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan or a trailer, if the automatic functions are activated but you are applying the parking brake manually,
  • when the gradient you are parked on may vary (e.g. on a ferry, on a lorry, during towing).

DS 4 (2014) - Maximum application is essential: - 1

In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, make a maximum application of the parking brake then turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

After a maximum application, the release time will be longer.

Automatic application, engine off

A (P)

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is automatically applied when the engine is switched off.

The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application, engine off - 2

  • illumination of the braking warning lamp and of the P warning lamp in the control lever A,
  • display of the message "Parking brake on".

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application, engine off - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application, engine off - 4

Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on fixed (not flashing).

Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic application, engine off - 5

In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

Automatic release

The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator:

Manual gearbox: press down fully on the clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse, press on the accelerator pedal and move off.
Electronic gearbox: select position A, M or R then press on the accelerator pedal.
Automatic gearbox: select position D, M or R then press the accelerator pedal.

Full release of the parking brake is confirmed by:

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic release - 1

  • the braking warning lamp and the P warning lamp in the control lever A going off,
  • display of the message "Parking brake off".

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic release - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic release - 3

When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, as you may release the parking brake.

Immobilising the vehicle, engine running

With the engine running and the vehicle stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle it is essential to manually apply the parking brake by pulling control lever A.

The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

DS 4 (2014) - Immobilising the vehicle, engine running - 1

  • illumination of the braking warning lamp and the P warning lamp in the control lever A,
  • display of the message "Parking brake on".

When the driver's door is opened, a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal, if the parking brake has not been applied, except in the case of an automatic gearbox with the gear lever in position P.

Particular situations

In certain situations (e.g. starting the engine), the parking brake can automatically alter its force. This is normal operation.

To advance your vehicle a few centimetres without starting the engine, but with the ignition on, press on the brake pedal and release the parking brake by pulling then releasing the control lever A. The full release of the parking brake is confirmed by the warning lamps in the control lever A and in the instrument panel going off and display of the message "Parking brake off".

If the parking brake develops a fault while applied or if the battery runs flat, an emergency release is always possible.

Emergency braking

In the event of a failure of the main service brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous pull on the control lever A will stop the vehicle.

The electronic stability control provides stability during emergency braking.

If the emergency braking malfunctions, the message "Parking brake faulty" will be displayed.

DS 4 (2014) - Emergency braking - 1

In the event of failure of the electronic stability control system, signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp, braking stability is then not guaranteed.

In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" actions on the control lever A.

DS 4 (2014) - Emergency braking - 2

Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on fixed, not flashing.

DS 4 (2014) - Emergency braking - 3

The emergency braking must only be used in exceptional circumstances.

Emergency release

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and seat components with red arrows indicating motion or movement

In the event of the electric parking brake malfunctioning or the battery running flat, an emergency device can be used to release the parking brake manually.

Access to tools

The tools are stowed in the storage box under the boot carpet.

Diagram showing a bent pipe with labeled points C and B, alongside two folded paper sheets with handwritten notes.

B Chocks*.
C Release crank*.

* Available according to equipment: if these tools are not present, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain them.

DS 4 (2014) - Access to tools - 2

natural_image Two identical illustrations of a car on a slope, showing acceleration direction with red arrows (no text or symbols)

Immobilise the vehicle (or keep it stationary, if the brake pedal is pressed), with the engine running, by engaging first gear (manual gearbox), position P (automatic gearbox) or position M or R (electronic gearbox).
Switch off the engine but leave the ignition on. If it is not possible to immobilise the vehicle, do not operate the control and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Immobilise the vehicle by placing the chocks in front or behind the two front wheels, opposite to the direction of the slope.

C D E

Remove the storage box under the boot carpet for access to the emergency release crank.
Pierce the protective cover D on the tube E with the release crank.
Introduce the release crank into the tube.
Turn the release crank clockwise. For safety reasons, it is essential to continue turning the crank until it reaches its stop. The parking brake is released.

Remove the release crank and stow it with the chocks in the storage box under the boot carpet.
- Switch the ignition off and then on to reinitialise the parking brake. If the reinitialisation of the parking brake proves impossible, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
- The subsequent time required for application may be longer than during normal operation.

DS 4 (2014) - Access to tools - 4

For safety reasons, after this operation it is essential to contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to replace the protective cover. Following an emergency unlocking, immobilisation of the vehicle is no longer assured once the manual emergency release has been deployed and the manual control does not allow the re-application of your parking brake.

Take no action, either on the control lever A, or stopping starting the engine while the release device is engaged. Take care not to allow moisture or dust in the proximity of the protective cover.

Driving

DS 4 (2014) - Access to tools - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Access to tools - 6

Operating faults

If the electric parking brake malfunction warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the vehicle in a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

SituationsConsequences
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 1 DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 2 DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 3- The automatic functions are deactivated.- Hill start assist is not available.- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:[ZZSC] DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 4- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the accelerator pedal and releasing the control.- Hill start assist is not available.- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 5 DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 6 DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 7 DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 8- The automatic functions are deactivated.- Hill start assist is not available.
and possiblyDS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 9flashingTo apply the elecimmobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake warning lamps.The application is slower than during normal operation.To release the electric parking brake:switch on the ignition.pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with the ignition on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground and have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:DS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 10and possiblyDS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 11flashing- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration functions are available.The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emergency braking are not available.
Battery faultDS 4 (2014) - Operating faults - 12- If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as the traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the two chocks under the wheels).Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.

Manual parking brake

DS 4 (2014) - Manual parking brake - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle cabin showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Applying

Pull the parking brake lever fully up to immobilise your vehicle.

Releasing

Pull the parking brake lever up gently, press the release button then lower the lever fully.

DS 4 (2014) - Releasing - 1

When the vehicle is being driven, if this warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, accompanied

by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, this indicates that the parking brake is still on or has not been properly released.

DS 4 (2014) - Releasing - 2

When parking on a slope, direct your wheels against the kerb, apply the parking brake, engage a gear and switch off the ignition.

6-speed manual gearbox

Engaging 5 or 6 ^th gear

Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5^th or 6^th gear.

Engaging reverse gear

DS 4 (2014) - Engaging reverse gear - 1

natural_image Illustration of a hand pressing a button with red arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Raise the ring under the knob and move the gear lever to the left then forwards.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

205 Driving

DS 4 (2014) - Engaging reverse gear - 2

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.

Electronic gearbox

Six-speed electronic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

There are two driving modes:

  • automated mode for automatic control of the gears by the gearbox, without any action on the part of the driver
  • manual mode for sequential gear changing by the driver using the steering mounted paddles.

In automated mode, you can temporarily take over control of gear changing.

Gear lever

DS 4 (2014) - Gear lever - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing a hand pushpin with mode number 2, no text or symbols present

R. Reverse
With your foot on the brake, lift the lever and push forwards.
N. Neutral.
With your foot on the brake, select this position to start.
A. Automated mode.
Move the lever backwards to select this mode.
M. Sequential mode with manual gear changing.
Move the lever backwards then to the left to select this mode, then use the steering mounted control paddles to change gear.

Steering mounted control paddles

DS 4 (2014) - Steering mounted control paddles - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and two red location markers (no text or symbols)

+. Change up paddle to the right of the steering wheel.
Press the back of the "+" steering mounted paddle to change up a gear.
- Change down paddle to the left of the steering wheel.
Press the back of the "-" steering mounted paddle to change down a gear.

DS 4 (2014) - Steering mounted control paddles - 2

The steering mounted paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to engage or disengage reverse gear.

Displays in the instrument panel

AUTO X1000

Gear lever positions

N. Neutral

R. Reverse

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Gears in sequential mode.

AUTO. This comes on when the automated mode is selected. It switches off on changing to sequential mode.

Moving off

Select position N.
Press the brake pedal down fully.
Start the engine.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 1

N appears in the instrument panel screen.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 2

N flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, if the ear lever is not in position N on starting.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 3

The Foot on brake warning lamp comes on the instrument panel, accompanied by an

audible signal and a message in the screen, if the brake pedal is not pressed on starting the engine.

Select automated mode (position A) or sequential mode (position M) or reverse (position R).
Release the parking brake unless it is programmed to automatic mode.
Progressively take your foot off the brake pedal.
Accelerate away.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 4

AUTO and 1, 1 or R appear in the instrument panel screen.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 5

You must press the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Automated mode

Select position A.

DS 4 (2014) - Automated mode - 1

AUTO and the gear engaged appear in the instrument panel screen.

The gearbox operates in auto-active mode, without any action on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear for:

  • optimisation of fuel consumption,
  • the style of driving,
  • the profile of the road.
  • the vehicle load.

For optimum acceleration, for example when overtaking another vehicle, press the accelerator pedal firmly past the point of resistance.

Never select neutral N when driving.

Temporary control of gear changing

You can temporarily take over control of gear changing using the "+" and "-" steering mounted paddles: if the engine speed allows, the request to change gear is acted on.

This function allows you to anticipate certain situations such as overtaking a vehicle or the approach to a corner.

After a few moments without any action on the control paddles, the gearbox resumes automatic control of the gears.

Manual mode

Select position M.

The gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel screen.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual mode - 1

The gear change requests are only acted on if the engine speed permits.

It is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.

When braking or slowing down, the gearbox changes down automatically to allow the vehicle to accelerate in the correct gear.

On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not change up unless the driver acts on the gear lever or the steering mounted paddles.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual mode - 2

You can change mode at any time by moving the gear lever from A to M or the other way round.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual mode - 3

Never select neutral N while the vehicle is moving.

Reverse

To engage reverse gear R, the vehicle must be immobilised with your foot on the brake pedal. Select position R.

DS 4 (2014) - Reverse - 1

Engagement of reverse gear is accompanied by an audible signal.

At low high speed, if reverse gear is requested, the N indicator flashes and the gearbox goes into neutral automatically. To engage reverse, put the gear lever in position N, then position R.

Stopping the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can:

  • move to position N to engage neutral, or
  • leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will not be possible to move the vehicle.

In both cases, you must apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Stopping the vehicle - 1

When immobilising the vehicle, with the engine running, you must place the gear lever in neutral N.

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, ensure that the gear lever is in neutral N and that the parking brake is applied.

Whatever the circumstances, you must manually apply the parking brake when parking, unless the parking brake is programmed in automatic mode.

Operating fault

With the ignition on, the flashing of AUTO, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, indicates a malfunction of the gearbox.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Automatic gearbox

Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing. Four driving modes are offered:

  • automatic operation for electronic management of the gears by the gearbox,
  • sport programme for a more dynamic style of driving,
  • snow programme to improve driving when traction is poor,
  • manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver.

Gear selection gate
Diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and a tool tip, likely illustrating a gear or mechanism.

  1. Gear lever.
  2. Button "S" (sport).
  3. Button "*" (snow).

Gear lever
DS 4 (2014) - Automatic gearbox - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

P. Park.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on or off.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, engine at idle.
N. Neutral.

- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on.

- Starting the engine.

D. Automatic operation.

M +/-. Manual operation with sequential changing of the six gears.

Press forwards to change up through the gears.

or

Press rearwards to change down through the gears.

Displays in the instrument panel
P X1000

When you move the lever in the gate to select a position, the corresponding indicator is displayed in the instrument panel.
P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (Automatic driving)
S. Sport programme
*. Snow programme
1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual operation
-. Invalid value during manual operation

Moving off

With your foot on the brake, select position P or N.
Start the engine.
If this procedure is not followed, there is an audible signal, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen.
With the engine running, press the brake pedal.
Release the parking brake, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.
Select position R, D or M,
Gradually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off immediately.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 1

If position N is engaged inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return to idle then engage position D to accelerate.

DS 4 (2014) - Moving off - 2

When the engine is running at idle, with the brakes released, if position R, D or M is selected, the vehicle moves even without the accelerator being pressed.

When the engine is running, never leave children in the vehicle without supervision.

When carrying out maintenance with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P.

Automatic operation

Select position D for automatic changing of the six gears.

The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive mode, without any intervention on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear according to the style of driving, the profile of the road and the load in the vehicle.

For maximum acceleration without touching the lever, press the accelerator pedal down fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down automatically or maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. On braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide efficient engine braking.

If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not change to a higher gear for safety reasons.

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic operation - 1

Never select position N while the vehicle is moving. Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.

Sport and snow programmes

These two special programmes supplement the automatic operation in very specific conditions of use.

Sport programme "S"

Press button "S", after starting the engine. The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic style of driving.

DS 4 (2014) - Sport programme "S" - 1

S appears in the instrument panel.

Snow programme " \* "

Press button "‡", after starting the engine. The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery roads.

This programme improves starting and drive when traction is poor.

DS 4 (2014) - Snow programme " \* " - 1

※ appears in the instrument panel.

Return to automatic operation

At any time, press the button selected again to quit the programme engaged and return to auto-adaptive mode.

Manual operation

Select position M for sequential changing of the six gears.
Push the lever towards the + sign to change up a gear.
Pull the lever towards the - sign to change down a gear.

It is only possible to change from one gear to another if the vehicle speed and engine speed permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate temporarily in automatic mode.

DS 4 (2014) - Manual operation - 1

D disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel.

If the engine speed is too low or too high, the gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then the actual gear engaged is displayed.

It is possible to change from position D (automatic) to position M (manual) at any time.

When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 automatically.

The sport and snow programmes do not operate in manual mode.

Operating fault

Invalid value during manual operation

DS 4 (2014) - Invalid value during manual operation - 1

This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly (selector between two positions).

Stopping the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral.

In both cases, apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.

When the ignition is on, the lighting of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, indicates a gearbox malfunction.

In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial knock when changing from P to R and from N to R. This will not cause any damage to the gearbox.

Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

This warning lamp may also come on if a door is opened.

DS 4 (2014) - Stopping the vehicle - 1

If the lever is not in position P, when the driver's door is opened or approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, there is an audible signal and a message appears.

Return the lever to position P; the audible signal stops and the message disappears.

DS 4 (2014) - Stopping the vehicle - 2

You risk damaging the gearbox:

  • if you press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time,
  • if you force the lever from position P to another position when the battery is flat.

DS 4 (2014) - Stopping the vehicle - 3

To reduce fuel consumption when stationary for long periods with the engine running (traffic jam...), position the gear lever at N and apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed in automatic mode.

Hill start assist

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This function is only active when:

  • the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal,
  • when certain conditions of gradient are met,
  • with the driver's door closed.
    The hill start assist function cannot be deactivated.

DS 4 (2014) - Hill start assist - 1

Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase. If you need to leave the vehicle while the engine is running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp is on (not flashing) in the instrument panel.

Operation

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 1

natural_image Diagram showing two cars on a slope with red arrows indicating motion, and an inset close-up of a device (no text or symbols)

On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a brief moment when you release the brake pedal:

  • if you are in first gear or neutral with a manual gearbox,
  • if you are in position A or M with an electronic gearbox.
  • if you are in position D or M with an automatic gearbox.

On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for a brief moment when you release the brake pedal.

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

SERVICE

If a fault occurs with the system, these warning lamps come on. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

Gear shift indicator

System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up. With an electronic gearbox, the system is only active in manual mode.

Operation

Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears.

The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. In fact, the configuration of the road, the amount of traffic and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the advice given by the system. This function cannot be deactivated.

Example:

- You are in third gear.

- You press the accelerator pedal.

4 X1000

- The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear.

The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow.

On vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow can be accompanied by the recommended gear.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 3

The system adapts its gear change recommendation according to the driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and the demands of the driver (power, acceleration, braking, ...).

The system never suggests:

  • engaging first gear,
  • engaging reverse gear,
  • engaging a lower gear.

Tyre under-inflation detection

Diagram showing a car wheel with a red arrow pointing to the wheel's center, likely indicating a directional or reference point.

System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.

The system continuously monitors the pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the vehicle is moving.

A pressure sensor is located in the valve of a each tyres (except the spare wheel).

The system triggers an alert if a drop in pressure is detected in one or more tyres.

The tyre under-inflation detection system is an aid to driving which does not replace the need for the driver to be vigilant or to drive responsibly.

This system does not avoid the need to check the tyre pressures regularly (including the spare wheel) and before a long journey.

Driving with under-inflated tyres adversely affects road holding, extends braking distances and causes premature tyre wear, particularly under arduous conditions (vehicle loaded, high speed, long journey).

Driving with under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption.

The tyre pressures for your vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label (see the "Identification markings" section).

The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after driving for less then 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speed).

Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the values indicated on the label.

Under-inflation alert

DS 4 (2014) - Under-inflation alert - 1

The alert is given by the fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal, and depending on equipment, the display of a message.

DS 4 (2014) - Under-inflation alert - 2

In the event of a problem on one of the tyres, the symbol or the message appears, according to equipment, to identify it.

Reduce speed, avoid sudden steering movements or harsh brake applications.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In the event of a puncture, use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel (according to equipment), or
if you have a compressor, the one in the temporary puncture repair kit for example, check the four tyre pressures when cold, or
if it is not possible to check the tyre pressures at the time, drive carefully at reduced speed.

DS 4 (2014) - Under-inflation alert - 3

The alert is maintained until the tyre or tyres concerned is reinflated or repaired.

DS 4 (2014) - Under-inflation alert - 4

The loss of pressure detected does not always lead to visible deformation of the tyre. Do not rely on just a visual check.

Driving

DS 4 (2014) - Under-inflation alert - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Under-inflation alert - 6

Operating fault

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by the illumination of the "service" warning lamp indicates a fault with the system.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

This alert is also displayed when one or more wheels is not fitted with a sensor.

In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is not assured.

Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Stop & Start

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.

Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.

Operation

Going into engine STOP mode

ECO

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby automatically:

  • with a manual gearbox, at speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h), when you put the gear lever into neutral and release the clutch pedal,
  • with an electronic gearbox, at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the brake pedal or put the gear lever into position N.

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 1

If your vehicle is fitted with the system, a time counter calculates the sum of the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It resets itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 2

With an electronic gearbox, for your comfort during parking maoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear.

STOP mode does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as braking, power steering, for example.

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 3

Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

Special cases: STOP mode unavailable

STOP mode is not invoked when:

  • the driver's door is open,
  • the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
  • the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last engine start using the key,
  • the electric parking brake is applied or being applied,
  • the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment,
  • demisting is active,
  • some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.

ECO

In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 1

DS 4 (2014) - ECO - 2

Going into engine START mode

DS 4 (2014) - Going into engine START mode - 1

The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine starts automatically:

  • with a manual gearbox, when you fully depress the clutch pedal,
  • with an electronic gearbox :

  • gear lever in position A or M, when you release the brake pedal,

  • or gear lever in position N and the brake pedal released, when you move the gear lever to position A or M,
    • or when you engage reverse gear.

DS 4 (2014) - Going into engine START mode - 2

With a manual gearbox in STOP mode, if a gear is engaged without fully depressing the clutch pedal, a warning lamp comes on or an alert message is displayed asking you to depress the clutch pedal to restart the engine.

Special cases: START invoked automatically

For safety reasons or to ensure smooth operation, START mode is invoked automatically when:

  • you open the driver's door,
  • you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
  • the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) with a manual gearbox or 7 mph (11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox,
  • the electric parking brake is being applied,
  • some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.

DS 4 (2014) - Special cases: START invoked automatically - 1

In this case the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

Deactivation

ECO OFF

At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to deactivate the system.

This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp coming on accompanied by the display of a message.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation - 2

If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.

Reactivation

Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.

The system is active again; this is confirmed by the switch warning lamp going off and the display of a message.

DS 4 (2014) - Reactivation - 1

The system is reactivated automatically at every new start using the key.

Operating fault Maintenance

ECO OFF

In the event of a malfunction with the system, the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes, then comes on continuously. have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault Maintenance - 2

In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall. All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on.

Depending on version, an alert message may also be displayed asking you to put the gear lever into position N and put your foot on the brake pedal. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition, then restart the engine using the key.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault Maintenance - 3

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from automatic operation of START mode.

This system requires a specific battery with a special specification and technology (reference numbers available from a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop).

Fitting a battery not listed by CITROËN introduces the risk of malfunction of the system.

ATTENTION BATTERIE SPECIFIÈNE EN CAS DE REPLACEMENT SE REVERÉS OBLIGATOIREMENT AU PAGES D'ATURATION D'AVOURABLE NE PAS INVERSA LES POLEANTES DE LA BATTERIAS, UTILISÉA UN CHARGÉUR 12V UNLIQUERENT WARNING SPECIFIC BATTERY IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT REVER ÉGOLATIONARY TO THE VEHICLE DO NOT REVERSE BATTERIE POLARITS, USE 12V CHARGER ONCE

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault Maintenance - 5

The Stop & Start system makes use of advanced technology. All work on this type of battery must be done only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Lane departure warning system

221

Driving

DS 4 (2014) - Lane departure warning system - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Lane departure warning system - 2

台

System which detects the involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the ground (solid or broken line).

Sensors, fitted below the front bumper, trigger a warning if the vehicle drifts over a lane marking (speed higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).

This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads.

DS 4 (2014) - Lane departure warning system - 4

The lane departure warning system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Activation

Press this button, the indicator lamp comes on.

Deactivation

Press this button again, the indicator lamp goes off.

The status of the system remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

Detection

You are warned by the vibration of the driver's seat cushion:

  • on the right-hand side, if the marking on the ground has been crossed on the right,
  • on the left-hand side, if the marking on the ground has been crossed on the left.

No warning is transmitted while the direction indicator is active and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicator is switched off.

A warning may be transmitted if a direction marking (e.g. arrow) or non-standard marking (e.g. graffiti) is crossed.

Operating fault

SERVICE

In the event of a malfunction, the service warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible

signal and a message in the screen.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 1

The detection may be impeded:

  • if the sensors are dirty (mud, snow...),
  • if the markings on the ground are worn,
  • if there is little contrast between the markings on the ground and the road surface.

Blind spot sensors

DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 1

natural_image Top-down diagram of three cars with red traffic cones and white sound waves, no text or symbols present

This driving assistance system warns the driver of the presence of another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from the driver's field of vision), as soon as this presents a potential danger.

Diagram showing car interior with sensor and camera components, including a red pointer and a small inset image of a car with sensors.

A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the side in question:

  • immediately, when being overtaken,
  • after a delay of about one second, when overtaking a vehicle slowly.

Operation
Diagram showing a car interior with a red directional arrow and a green indicator box, likely indicating a vehicle or signal flow.

On switching on the ignition, or engine running, press this button to activate the function; the warning lamp comes on. Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers monitor the blind spots.

This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to assess the distances and relative speeds of other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane. The blind spot sensor system can never replace the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

The alert is given by a warning lamp which comes on in the door mirror on the side in question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry, cycle - is detected and the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • all the vehicles must be moving in the same direction.
  • the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and 75 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
  • the difference in speed between your vehicle and the other vehicles must be less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
  • the traffic must be flowing normally,
  • in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre, if this is prolonged and the vehicle being overtaken remains in the blind spot,
  • you are driving on a straight or slightly curved road,
  • your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan...

DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 4

natural_image Two cars on a road with red crosshair markers indicating no overlap or intersection (no text or symbols present)

No alert will be given in the following situations:

  • in the presence of stationary objects (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs...),
  • with vehicles moving in the opposite direction,
  • driving on a sinuous road or a sharp corner,

DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 5

natural_image Two identical car head positions viewed from the side, each with a red cross symbol indicating no violation or absence of any vehicle (no text or symbols present)
  • when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is at the same time detected at the rear in the blind spot angle and present in the driver's forward field of vision,
  • in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front and behind are confused with a lorry or a stationary object,
  • when overtaking quickly.

DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 6

natural_image Interior view of a car showing a red arrow pointing to the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

To deactivate the system, press this button again; the warning lamp goes off.
The state of the system remains in memory on switching off the ignition.

DS 4 (2014) - Blind spot sensors - 7
The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towbar approved by CITROËN.

Operating fault

In the event of a fault, the warning lamp in the button flashes then goes off.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

The system may suffer temporary interference in certain weather conditions (rain, hail...).

In particular, driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle).

In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow.

Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects; they may hamper the correct operation of the system.

Memorising speeds

This memorisation of speeds applies to both the speed limiter and the cruise control.

You can memorise up to 5 speeds in the system. By default, a few speeds are already memorised.

With your Audio system
LIST SOURCE # OK BAND MENU

Go to the main menu by pressing the "MENU" button.
Select the "Personalisation-configuration" menu and confirm.
Select "Vehicle parameters" menu and confirm.
Select the "Driving assistance" line and conform.
Select "Speeds memorised" line and confirm.
Modify the speed.
Select "OK" and confirm to save the modifications.

For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out these operations when stationary.

With the eMyWay satellite navigation system
Diagram showing a car door switch with a red arrow pointing to the left side of the door panel.

Go to the main menu by pressing the left hand thumb wheel at the bottom of the steering wheel.
Select the "Vehicle parameters" menu and confirm.
Select the "Driving assistance" line and confirm.
Select the "Speeds memorised" line and confirm.
Modify the speed.
Select "OK" and confirm to save the modifications.

These operations are only possible when stationary with this system.

225

Driving

DS 4 (2014) - Memorising speeds - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Memorising speeds - 4

Access
+ - LIMIT Cruise MEM

Press the "MEM" button to display the list of speeds memorised.

Selection

To select a memorised speed:

press and hold the "+" or "-" button; the system stops at the nearest memorised speed,
press and hold again the "+" or "-" button to select another memorised speed.
A reminder of the speed and the state of the system (on/off) is displayed in the instrument panel.

Speed limiter

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

When the programmed speed limit is reached, pressing the accelerator pedal no longer has any effect.

Operation

The speed limiter is switched on manually: it requires a programmed speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h).

The speed limiter is switched off by manual operation of the control.

The programmed speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly beyond the point of resistance.

To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal.

The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation - 1

The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to respect speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Steering mounted controls
1 2 3 4 LIMIT MEM 5

The functions of this system are grouped together on the steering mounted controls.

  1. Speed limiter mode selection wheel.
  2. Programmed value decrease button.
  3. Programmed value increase button.
  4. Speed limiter on / off button.
  5. List of memorised speeds display button. (see the "Memorising speeds" section)

Displays in the instrument panel
6 PAUSE 7 LIMIT 8 90 km/h

The programmed information is grouped together in the instrument panel screen.

  1. Speed limiter on / off indication.
  2. Speed limiter mode selection indication.
  3. Programmed speed value.
  4. Selection of a memorised speed. (see "Memorising speeds")

Programming

1 2 3 4 LIMIT CREASE 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed.
Set the speed value by pressing button 2 or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph (90 km/h)).

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3:

  • by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
  • in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.

If speed memorisation is available and activated on your vehicle, the programmed speed will stop at the closest memorised speed; refer to the corresponding paragraph.

Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4.
Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button 4: the display confirms that it has been switched off (Pause).
Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4 again.

Exceeding the programmed speed

Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed speed will not have any effect unless you press the pedal firmly past the point of resistance.

The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the programmed speed, which is still displayed, flashes.

Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the programmed speed.

DS 4 (2014) - Exceeding the programmed speed - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Exceeding the programmed speed - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Exceeding the programmed speed - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Exceeding the programmed speed - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Exceeding the programmed speed - 5

Exiting the speed limiter mode

Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the speed limiter mode is deselected. It disappears from the screen.

Operating fault

In the event of a fault with the speed limiter, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 2

On a steep descent or in the event of sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

  • ensure that the mat is positioned correctly,
  • do not fit one mat on top of another.

Cruise control

System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

Operation

The cruise control is switched on manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) and engagement of:

  • fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
  • second gear on the electronic gearbox system or automatic gearbox, in sequential driving mode,

- position A on the electronic gearbox system or D on an automatic gearbox.

The cruise control is switched off manually or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on triggering of the ESP system for safety reasons.

It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.

To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal.

Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed value.

Steering mounted controls

1 2 3 4 LIMIT CLOUS MEM 5

The functions of this system are grouped together on the steering mounted controls.

  1. Cruise control mode selection dial.
  2. Speed programming/value decrease button.
  3. Speed programming/value increase button.
  4. Cruise control off/resume button.
  5. Memorised speeds display button. (see "Memorising speeds")

Displays in the instrument panel

6 PAUSE CRUISE 110 km/h 7 9

The programmed information is grouped together in the instrument panel screen.

  1. Cruise control off/resume indication.
  2. Cruise control mode selection indication.
  3. Programmed speed value.

  4. Selecting a stored speed. (see "Storing speeds")

DS 4 (2014) - Displays in the instrument panel - 2

The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to respect speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver. You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at all times.

Programming

3 + - 4 1 UNLESSUE 2 5 MISM

Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).
Set the programmed speed by accelerating to the required speed, then press button 2 or 3 (e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)); the cruise control system is activated (ON).

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3:

  • by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
  • in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.

If storing speeds is available and activated on your vehicle, the programmed speed will stop at the closest stored speed; refer to the corresponding section.

Stop the cruise control system by pressing button 4: this is confirmed in the screen (Pause).
Switch on the cruise control again with another press on button 4.

Exceeding the programmed speed

Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed speed results in flashing of this speed in the screen.

Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the speed.

Exiting cruise control mode

Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode is deselected. It disappears from the screen.

DS 4 (2014) - Exiting cruise control mode - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Exiting cruise control mode - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Exiting cruise control mode - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Exiting cruise control mode - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Exiting cruise control mode - 5

Operating fault

In the event of a cruise control malfunction, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Operating fault - 1

When the cruise control is switched on, be careful if you maintain the pressure on one of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in a very rapid change in the speed of your vehicle.

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traffic.

On a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

On steep climbs or when towing, the programmed speed may not be reached or maintained.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

  • ensure that the mat is positioned correctly.
  • never fit one mat on top of another.

Parking space sensors

DS 4 (2014) - Parking space sensors - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a car with two cars on a road and one car moving toward it, with red arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

System which measures the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles. It measures the size of the space and gives you information on:

  • the possibility of fitting into a free space, depending on the dimensions of your vehicle and the distances needed for manoeuvring,
  • the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to be performed.

The system does not measure spaces which are clearly much smaller or larger than the size of the vehicle.

Displays in the instrument panel

DS 4 (2014) - Displays in the instrument panel - 1

The parking space sensor function warning lamp can have two different states:

  • on fixed: the function is selected by a press on control A.
  • off: the function is not selected,

Operation
XP A

You have identified a parking space:

Press button A to select the function.

Operate the direction indicator on the side where the space is to be measured; a message is displayed to confirm that measurement is in progress.
During measurement, go forward the length of the space, at a speed less than 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), to prepare for your manoeuvre.
Once the measurement has been completed, the system informs you of the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre by a message in the multifunction screen accompanied by an audible signal.

The function displays the following types of message:

Parking possible OK

Parking possible

Parking difficult

Parking difficult

Parking not advised

Parking not advised

The function deselects itself automatically:

  • when you engage reverse gear,
  • when you switch off the ignition,
  • if measuring is not requested,
  • within five minutes of selection of the function,
  • if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold of 45 mph (approx. 70 km/h) for one minute.

If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the parking space is too large, the system may not be able to measure the space.

The system remains available after each measurement and can therefore measure several spaces in succession.

In poor or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are free of dirt, ice or snow.

The parking space sensor system deactivates the front parking sensors when measuring forwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Displays in the instrument panel - 6

If there is a fault, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Parking sensors

Diagram showing vehicle interior with red arrows indicating directional changes or movement, likely illustrating vehicle dynamics or safety changes.

This system indicates the proximity of an obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, gate, etc.) which comes within the field of detection of sensors located in the bumper.

Certain types of obstacle (stake, roadworks cone, etc.) detected initially will no longer be detected at the end of the manoeuvre due to the presence of blind spots.

DS 4 (2014) - Parking sensors - 2

This function cannot, in any circumstances, take the place of the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

Rear parking sensors

BIP... BIP... BIP...

The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear. This is accompanied by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you exit reverse gear.

Audible assistance

The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.

The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is located. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous.

Diagram showing traffic warning symbols and vehicle detection icons, including warning signs, car, and a battery.

Visual assistance

This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars in the multifunction screen which move progressively nearer to the vehicle. When the obstacle is near, the "Danger" symbol is displayed in the screen.

Front parking sensors

In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).

The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear, if no further obstacles are detected or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

DS 4 (2014) - Front parking sensors - 1

The sound emitted by the speaker (front or rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in front or behind.

Deactivation/Activation of the front and rear parking sensors

P OFF

The function is deactivated by pressing this button. The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Pressing this button again reactivates the function. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

DS 4 (2014) - Deactivation/Activation of the front and rear parking sensors - 2

The function will be deactivated automatically if a trailer is being towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by CITROËN).

Operating fault

SERVICE

In the event of a malfunction of the system, when reverse gear is engaged this warning lamp

is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal (short beep).

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 1

In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty. Certain sound sources (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger the audible signals of the parking sensor system.

010 Checks 4

DS 4 (2014) - SERVICE - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car's roof and window panels with abstract curved lines and a red square marker (no text or symbols)

TOTAL & CITROËN

Partners in performance and protecting the environment

Innovation in the search for performance

For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and Development departments have developed for CITROËN, lubricants to match the latest technical innovations on CITROËN vehicles, both for competition and for everyday motoring.

For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain of the best performance for your engine.

Optimum protection for your engine

By having your CITROËN vehicle serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you are contributing towards improving the life and performances of your engine, while also protecting the environment.

DS 4 (2014) - Optimum protection for your engine - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Optimum protection for your engine - 2

natural_image Scientist in lab coat examining a flask with orange liquid, alongside a car with 'TOTAL' branding (no readable text on main subject)

DS 4 (2014) - Optimum protection for your engine - 3

CITROËN

CITROËN prefers TOTAL

DS 4 (2014) - Optimum protection for your engine - 4

TOTAL

Bonnet

Opening

DS 4 (2014) - Opening - 1

Before doing anything under the bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.

Diagram showing a car interior with red circular markers labeled 'A' and a black rectangular device, likely indicating a location or component.

Open the front left door.

√ Pull the interior bonnet release lever A, located at the bottom of the door aperture.

DS 4 (2014) - Opening - 3

The location of the interior bonnet release lever prevents opening of the bonnet while the front left door is closed.

DS 4 (2014) - Opening - 4

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle interior with a red arrow and letter B indicating a specific location (no text or symbols present)

Push the exterior safety catch B to the left and raise the bonnet.

Diagram showing a mechanical lever mechanism with red arrows indicating motion or force directions, including a circular component labeled 'C' and a small inset image.

  • Unclip the stay C from its housing on the back of the bonnet.
    √ Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet open.

Checks

DS 4 (2014) - Opening - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Opening - 7

Closing

Take the stay out of the support notch.
Clip the stay in its housing on the back of the bonnet.
Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that it is secured correctly.

DS 4 (2014) - Closing - 1

Do not open the bonnet in high winds. When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay with care (risk of burns).

Running out of fuel (Diesel)

On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel; refer to the corresponding engine compartment view.

DS 4 (2014) - Running out of fuel (Diesel) - 1

If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with a misfuel prevention device, refer to the "Misfuel prevention (Diesel)" section.

DS 4 (2014) - Running out of fuel (Diesel) - 2

If the engine does not start first time, don't keep trying but start the procedure again from the beginning.

1.6 litre HDi engine

Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the styling cover for access to the priming pump.
Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press).
Operate the starter until the engine starts (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again).
If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine.
Clip the styling cover back in place.
Close the bonnet.

2 litre HDi engine

Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of Diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the style cover for access to the priming pump.
Slacken the bleed screw.
Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until fuel appears in the transparent pipe.
Tighten the bleed screw.
Operate the starter until the engine starts (if the engine fails to start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again).
If the engine fails to start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again, then the starter.
Put the style cover back in position and clip it in place, ensuring that it has clipped correctly.
Close the bonnet.

Petrol engines

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.

  1. Power steering reservoir.
  2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
  3. Coolant reservoir.
  4. Brake fluid reservoir.
  5. Battery/Fuses.
  6. Fusebox.
  7. Air filter.
  8. Engine oil dipstick.
  9. Engine oil filler cap.

Diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

Checks

DS 4 (2014) - Petrol engines - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Petrol engines - 3

Diesel engines

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.

  1. Power steering reservoir.
  2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
  3. Coolant reservoir.
  4. Brake fluid reservoir.
  5. Battery/Fuses.
  6. Fusebox.
  7. Air filter.
  8. Engine oil dipstick.
  9. Engine oil filler cap.
  10. Priming pump*.
  11. Bleed screw*.

Diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components and a red traffic cone indicating flow or movement.

Checking levels

Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the maintenance and warranty guide. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Checking levels - 1

Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).

Oil level

DS 4 (2014) - Oil level - 1

The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel, or using the dipstick.

It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

DS 4 (2014) - Oil level - 2

It is normal to top up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). CITROËN recommends that you check the level, and top up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).

After topping up the oil, the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel is not valid during the 30 minutes after topping up.

Engine oil change

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the interval for this operation. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, the use of additives in the engine oil is prohibited.

Oil specifi cation

The oil must be the correct grade for your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Checks

DS 4 (2014) - Oil specifi cation - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Oil specifi cation - 2

Brake fluid level

DS 4 (2014) - Brake fluid level - 1

The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.

Changing the fluid

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the interval for this operation.

Fluid specification

The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Power steering fluid level

DS 4 (2014) - Power steering fluid level - 1

The power steering fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. With the engine cold, unscrew the cap to check the level.

Fluid specifi cation

The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Screenwash / headlamp wash fluid level

DS 4 (2014) - Screenwash / headlamp wash fluid level - 1

To check the level or top up the fluid on vehicle fitted with headlamp washers, immobilise the vehicle and switch of the engine.

Coolant level

DS 4 (2014) - Coolant level - 1

The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it.

When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.

In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work.

To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.

DS 4 (2014) - Coolant level - 2

The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might become caught by the fan blades.

Diagram illustrating a mechanical or electrical component being adjusted to a motor, with red arrows indicating motion direction.

Additive level (Diesel with particle emissions filter) Used products

Open the bonnet and secure it with the stay.
Open the screenwash reservoir filler cap.
Take and pinch the level gauge to block its breather.
Remove the gauge completely from the reservoir to read the level in the transparent section.
Top up if necessary.
Refit the filler cap to the reservoir and close the bonnet.

Specification of the fluid

To ensure optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, the fluid should never be topped up or replaced by plain water.

In wintry conditions, the use of a fluid with an ethyl alcohol or methanol base is recommended.

According to your version of instrument panel, the additive reservoir low level is indicated by:

DS 4 (2014) - Specification of the fluid - 1

- fixed illumination of the particle emissions filter warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message that the particle emissions filter additive level is too low,

or

SERVICE

- fixed illumination of the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message that the particle emissions filter additive level is too low.

Topping up

The reservoir must be topped up without delay by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Topping up - 1

Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin.

Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.

DS 4 (2014) - Topping up - 2

Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground.

Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.

Checks

Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the maintenance and warranty guide and according to your engine. Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

12 V battery

DS 4 (2014) - V battery - 1

The battery does not require any maintenance.

However, check that the terminals are clean and correctly tightened,

particularly in summer and winter.

When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the "12 V battery" section for details of the precautions to be taken before disconnecting the battery and following its reconnection.

ATTENTION BATTERIE SPECIFIÈ EN CAS DE REPLACEMENT SE REPERES OBLIGATORIEMENT AU PARAI D'UTILIZATION OU VIVARES DE PAS INVERES LES POUARIES DE LA BATTERIEL, UTILISER UN CHARGEUR 12V UNIGUIPEMENT 12V 24V WARNING SPECIFIC BATTERY IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT REPER OBLIGATOUTLY TO THE CHARGEUR OF THE TURRICULE DO NOT REVERSE BATTERY POLIANTS. USE 12V CHARGEUR ONLY

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and specification. The involvement of a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop is essential when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

Air filter and passenger compartment filter

DS 4 (2014) - Air filter and passenger compartment filter - 1

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the replacement intervals for these components.

Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary.

A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.

Oil filter

DS 4 (2014) - Oil filter - 1

Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed.

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the replacement interval for this component.

Particle emission filter (Diesel)

According to your version of instrument panel, the start of saturation of the particle emissions filter is indicated by:

DS 4 (2014) - Particle emission filter (Diesel) - 1

- fixed illumination of the particle emissions filter warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message that there is a risk of blockage of the particle emissions filter,

or

SERVICE

- temporary illumination of the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message that there is a risk of blockage of the particle emissions filter.

As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.

If the warning lamp stays on, refer to the "Additive level" section.

On a new vehicle, the first operations of regeneration of the particle emissions filter may be accompanied by the smell of "burning", which is perfectly normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

Manual gearbox

DS 4 (2014) - Manual gearbox - 1

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for the details of the king interval for this component.

Electronic gearbox

DS 4 (2014) - Electronic gearbox - 1

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the checking interval for this component.

Automatic gearbox

DS 4 (2014) - Automatic gearbox - 1

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the level checking interval for this component.

Brake pads

DS 4 (2014) - Brake pads - 1

Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to

have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services.

Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

Brake disc wear

DS 4 (2014) - Brake disc wear - 1

For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Manual parking brake

DS 4 (2014) - Manual parking brake - 1

If a loss of effectiveness of this system is noticed, the parking brake must be checked, even between two services.

Checking this system must be done by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Electric parking brake

DS 4 (2014) - Electric parking brake - 1

This system does not require any routine servicing. However, in the event of a problem, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

For more information, refer to the "Electric parking brake - Operating faults" section.

DS 4 (2014) - Electric parking brake - 2

Only use products recommended by

CITROËN or products of equivalent quality and specification.

In order to optimise the operation of units as important as those in the braking system, CITROËN selects and offers very specific products.

After washing the vehicle, dampness, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Make light brake applications to dry and defrost the brakes.

Checks

DS 4 (2014) - Electric parking brake - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Electric parking brake - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Electric parking brake - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Electric parking brake - 6

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

011 Practical information

DS 4 (2014) - Practical information - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Practical information - 2

natural_image Close-up of a car's front wheel and side door, showing red LED highlights and a circular opening (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - Practical information - 3

Temporary puncture repair kit

Complete system consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge which permits temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder.

Access to the kit
DS 4 (2014) - Temporary puncture repair kit - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car trunk with a small electronic device inserted, no text or symbols present

This kit is installed in the storage box, under the boot floor.

Description of the kit
A B C D E

A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B. On "I" / off "O" switch.
C. Deflation button.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and p.s.i.).
E. Compartment housing: - a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket, - various inflation adaptors for accessories, such as balls, bicycle tyres...

80° 50° 1 H G F

F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair.
H. Black pipe for inflation.

I. Speed limit sticker.

DS 4 (2014) - Temporary puncture repair kit - 4

The speed limit sticker I must be affixed to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.

Repair procedure

A B

Medical device diagram showing a test tube connected to two medical sensors with labeled probe and catheter

Diagram showing a test setup with labeled components and red arrows indicating direction of movement or force, possibly illustrating a diagnostic or testing procedure.

1. Sealing

Switch off the ignition.
Turn the selector A to the "sealant" position.
Check that the switch B is in position "O".

DS 4 (2014) - Sealing - 1

  • Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
    Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
    Connect the white pipe to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

  • Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
    Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

DS 4 (2014) - Sealing - 2

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.

DS 4 (2014) - Sealing - 3

Take care, this product is harmful (e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.

Keep this product out of the reach of children.

DS 4 (2014) - Sealing - 4

The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of a compressor for long enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture repair or for inflating a small inflatable accessory.

DS 4 (2014) - Sealing - 5

Switch on the compressor by moving the switch B to position "I" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.

The sealant is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing).

Tyre under-inflation detection

If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-inflation detection, the under-inflation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Do not start the compressor before connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the sealant product would be expelled through the pipe.

If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

20 - 60 km/h 15 - 35 mph 0 5 km 3 miles

Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe.

Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.

Drive immediately for approximately three miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.

Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

Diagram showing a diagnostic tool with labeled points A and H, connected to a car wheel, likely illustrating a diagnostic or testing setup.

Diagram showing electrical connection with red arrows indicating cable or switch components, likely illustrating a power or signal detection setup.

Diagram showing a multimeter connected to a terminal with labeled parts A, B, and C, highlighting a red arrow pointing to component B.

2. Inflation

Turn the selector A to the "air" position.
Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel.

DS 4 (2014) - Inflation - 1

Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.

As soon as possible, go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

You must inform the technician that you have used this kit. After inspection, the technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced.

Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the left hand door aperture).

A loss of pressure indicates that the puncture has not been fully plugged; contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop for assistance.

Remove and stow the kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles (200 km).

Removing the cartridge

DS 4 (2014) - Removing the cartridge - 1

natural_image Pure diagram of a mechanical component with a red downward arrow indicating force or direction (no text or symbols)

Stow the black pipe.

Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
Support the compressor vertically.
Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.

Beware of discharges of fluid.

The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the cartridge.

The sealant cartridge is designed for single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.

After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to an authorised waste disposal site or a CITROËN dealer.

Do not forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from CITROËN dealers or from a qualified workshop.

Checking tyre pressures / inflating accessories

Diagram showing a diagnostic tool with labeled points A and H, likely illustrating a diagnostic or testing procedure.

You can also use the compressor, without injecting any product, to:

  • check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
  • inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle tyres...).

Turn the selector A to the "Air" position.
Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel or accessory. If necessary, fit one of the adaptors supplied with the kit first.

DS 4 (2014) - Checking tyre pressures / inflating accessories - 2

Diagram showing electrical connections with labeled components and red arrows indicating direction of connection

Connect the compressor's electrical connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure label or the accessory's pressure label.
Remove the kit then stow it.

Changing a wheel

Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

Access to the tools

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the tools - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car showing the front wheel, dashboard, and engine compartment with a red upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

The tools are installed in the boot under the floor.

To gain access to them:

open the boot,

raise the floor,

secure it by hooking its cord on the hook on the rear shelf support,

with a standard size spare wheel, unclip and remove the box in the middle of the wheel containing the tools, or

with a "space-saver" spare wheel; lift the wheel at the rear towards you for access to the storage box containing the tools.

Technical diagram of a mechanical clamp assembly with numbered parts for identification

List of tools

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle. Do not use them for other purposes.

  1. Wheelbrace.

For removing the wheel trim and the wheel fixing bolts.

  1. Jack with integral handle.

For raising the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - List of tools - 1

Wheel with trim

When removing the wheel, detach the trim first using the wheelbrace 1 pulling at the valve passage hole.

When refitting the wheel, refit the trim starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.

  1. "Bolt cover" tool.

For removing the bolt protectors (covers) on alloy wheels.

  1. Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box).

For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts.

Access to the spare wheel

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the spare wheel - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a car wheel assembly showing top and side views (no text or symbols)

The spare wheel is installed in the boot under the floor.

Depending on version, the spare wheel may be a standard size steel or alloy wheel, or for some countries it is the "space saver" type.

For access to the spare wheel, refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools" on the previous page.

Tyre under-inflation detection

The spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor. The punctured wheel must be repaired by a CITROËN dealer or aqualified workshop.

If your vehicle has an electric parking brake, only a space saver wheel can be stowed in the boot.

DS 4 (2014) - Tyre under-inflation detection - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car wheel with red arrows indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Taking out the standard wheel

Unscrew the yellow central bolt.
Raise the spare wheel towards you from the rear.
Take the wheel out of the boot.

Diagram showing a car tire with red arrows indicating motion or force direction, likely illustrating vehicle wheel movement or steering system.

DS 4 (2014) - Taking out the standard wheel - 2

natural_image Cross-sectional diagram of a car showing internal components inside a vehicle (no text or labels)

Putting the standard wheel back in place

Put the wheel back in its housing.
Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few turns then put it in place in the centre of the wheel.
Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to retain the wheel correctly.

Put the box back in place in the centre of the wheel and clip it.

Practical information

DS 4 (2014) - Putting the standard wheel back in place - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Putting the standard wheel back in place - 2

Removing a wheel

Diagram of a car showing tire alignment with labeled parts A, B, and numbered points 1 and 2

Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery ground.

Apply the parking brake unless it has been programmed to automatic mode, switch off the ignition and engage first gear * to lock the wheels.

Check that the braking warning lamps in the instrument panel are on (not flashing).

The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.

Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.

Diagram illustrating car wheel assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

List of operations

Remove the chromed bolt cover from each of the bolts using the tool 3 (according to equipment).
Fit the security socket 4 on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt.
Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

DS 4 (2014) - List of operations - 1

DS 4 (2014) - List of operations - 2

Diagram showing car wheel assembly with labeled parts A and 2, indicating mounting or repair instructions.

DS 4 (2014) - List of operations - 4

natural_image Diagram of a car wheel with red arrows indicating mechanical or repair components (no text or symbols)

Place the jack 2 in contact with one of the two front A or rear B locations provided on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.
Extend the jack 2 until its base plate is in contact with the ground. Ensure that the centreline of the jack base plate is directly below the location A or B used.
Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.

Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.
Remove the wheel.

Fitting a wheel

DS 4 (2014) - Fitting a wheel - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car showing suspension system and wheel assembly (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Fitting a wheel - 2

Fitting a steel or "space-saver" spare wheel

If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fitting it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the steel or "space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical contact of each bolt.

DS 4 (2014) - Fitting a steel or "space-saver" spare wheel - 1

After changing a wheel

To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly, first remove the central cover.

When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Have the punctured wheel repaired and replace it on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Diagram showing car wheel assembly with numbered parts and a red arrow indicating rotation or adjustment.

List of operations

Put the wheel in place on the hub.
Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
Pre-tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4.
Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

DS 4 (2014) - List of operations - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car wheel with a red-handled tool and numbered component (no text or symbols)

Lower the vehicle fully.
Fold the jack 2 and detach it.

Diagram illustrating car tire assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

Tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4.
Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
Refit the chromed bolt covers on each of the bolts (according to equipment).
Store the tools in the box.

Snow chains

In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.

DS 4 (2014) - Snow chains - 1

The snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels.

Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:

Original tyre sizeMaximum link size.
215/60 R169 mm 215/55
225/45 R18
225/40 R19cannot be fitted with chains

For more information on snow chains, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Snow chains - 2

Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum running speed authorised.

Advice on installation

If you have to fit the chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road.
Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle.
Fit the chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer.
Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 30 mph (50 km/h).
Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.

DS 4 (2014) - Advice on installation - 1

Avoid driving on roads that have been cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. It is recommended that before you leave, you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.

Changing a bulb

Practical information

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a bulb - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a bulb - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a bulb - 3

The headlamps are fitted with polycarbonate glass with a protective coating:

do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product,
use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product,
when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a bulb - 4

Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for a few minutes (risk of serious burns).

Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is imperative to use only anti-traviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp.

Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a bulb - 5

Risk of electrocution

Xenon bulbs (D1S-35W) must be replaced by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Risk of electrocution - 1

Bulbs with lugs, type H1, H7... take care to position them correctly to ensure the best lighting.

Front lamps

Diagram of car interior with numbered adjustment knobs and control buttons

Diagram of car interior with numbered components for identification

DS 4 (2014) - Front lamps - 3

natural_image Diagram of a car's seatbelt mechanism showing red directional arrows indicating movement (no text or labels)

Model with xenon and dimodehalith halogen headlamps

headlamps

  1. Directional dipped/main beam headlamps (D1S-35W).
  2. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
  3. Daytime running lamps (P21/5W XL).
  4. Sidelamps (LEDs).
  5. Foglamps (H11-55W).

  6. Direction indicators (H21 clear).

  7. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
  8. Main beam headlamps (H1-55W).
  9. Daytime running lamps (P21/5W XL).
  10. Sidelamps (LEDs).
  11. Foglamps (H11-55W).

Access to bulbs

Depending on the engine and only on the left hand side, you must first carry out the following operations for access to the protective covers on the bulbs.

Remove the air deflector by unclipping each of its three attachment points.
Unclip the bonnet release cable at its two fixings.
Move the cable down.

After changing the failed bulb, remember to put everything back in place (cable and air deflector).

DS 4 (2014) - Access to bulbs - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing a valve mechanism and a mechanical component with red arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Access to bulbs - 2

natural_image Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with directional arrows and a highlighted component (no text or labels)

DS 4 (2014) - Access to bulbs - 3

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing engine, air intake, and dashboard components (no text or labels)

Changing direction indicator Model with Xenon headlamps

bulbs

DS 4 (2014) - bulbs - 1

Rapid flashing of the direction indicator warning lamp (right or left) indicates the failure of a bulb on that side.

Model with halogen headlamps

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and extract it.

Pull out the bulb and change it. To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Remove the protective cover by pulling on its tongue.

Disconnect the electrical connector.
Separate the springs to release the bulb.
Pull the bulb out and replace it.

To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

DS 4 (2014) - Model with halogen headlamps - 1

Amber coloured bulbs, such as the direction indicators, must be replaced with bulbs of identical specifications and colour.

Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs (only on models with halogen headlamps)

Remove the protective cover by pulling on the tab.

Disconnect the bulb connector.
Spread the springs to release the bulb.
Extract the bulb and change it.

To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs (only on models with halogen headlamps) - 1

When refitting, close the protective cover carefully to preserve the sealing of the headlamp.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs (only on models with halogen headlamps) - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, gear mechanism, and dashboard (no text or labels)

DS 4 (2014) - Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs (only on models with halogen headlamps) - 3

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows and a red dot, no readable text or symbols present.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs (only on models with halogen headlamps) - 4

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior corner with a red checkmark pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols)

Changing main beam headlamp bulbs (only on models with halogen headlamps)

Remove the protective cover by pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Squeeze the springs to release the bulb.
Pull out the bulb and replace it.

To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Changing daytime running lamp bulbs

Remove the protective cover by pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and extract it.
Pull the bulb and change it.

To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters

Insert a screwdriver towards the centre of the repeater between the repeater and the base of the mirror.
Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater and remove it.
Disconnect the repeater connector.

To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain replacement repeaters.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a car seat and its rear wheel, with a red arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols)

Changing the side spotlamps

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters - 3

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing the dashboard and side panel with a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

Changing the LED lamps/sidelamps

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters - 4

natural_image Diagram showing two views of a car's front and side compartments with red directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Changing foglamp bulbs

Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in the finisher.
Pull and lever to unclip the bumper finisher (the parking sensor stays with the finisher).
Remove the two module fixing screws and remove it from its housing.

Disconnect the bulb holder connector.

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and extract it.

Pull the bulb and change it.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

To replace these bulbs you may also contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Rear lamps
Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels indicating different sections of the vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel.

  1. Brake lamps (P21/5W).
  2. Sidelamps (LEDs).
  3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber)
  4. Reversing lamp (P21W).
  5. Rear foglamps (P21W).

DS 4 (2014) - Changing foglamp bulbs - 2

Amber bulbs, such as those for the direction indicators, must be replaced by bulbs of the same rating and colour. The lamps on the tailgate, other than the guide lamps, are dummy units. They are there for aesthetic purposes only.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing foglamp bulbs - 3

natural_image Technical line drawing of a car interior showing front and side views with red arrows indicating components (no text or symbols)

Changing stop lamp, reversing lamp and direction indicator bulbs

These three bulbs are changed from inside the boot:

open the boot,
remove the access grille from the corresponding side trim panel,
slacken the two nuts using a 10 mm tube spanner then remove the nuts by hand,
unclip the lamp unit connector,
extract the lamp unit carefully pulling in its middle towards the outside,

remove the foam seal,
unclip the two small secondary connectors,
spread the two tabs and remove the bulb holder.
turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it.

To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Take care to engage the lamp unit in its guides, while keeping it in line with the vehicle.

Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but without damaging the lamp.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing stop lamp, reversing lamp and direction indicator bulbs - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a road intersection with two red arrows pointing to specific lane segments (no text or labels)

Changing the LED lamps/sidelamps

DS 4 (2014) - Changing stop lamp, reversing lamp and direction indicator bulbs - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior with two red directional arrows pointing to the dashboard area (no text or symbols)

Number plate lamps (W5W)

DS 4 (2014) - Changing stop lamp, reversing lamp and direction indicator bulbs - 3

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car with a red arrow pointing to the roof section (no text or symbols)

Third brake lamp (LEDs)

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

To facilitate the removal of the lamp, carry out this operation with the tailgate half open.

Insert a thin screwdriver into the lens cutout.
Push it outwards.
Remove the lens.
Change the faulty bulb.

To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Changing a fuse

Access to the tools

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the tools - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car's front bumper and side panel with a red arrow indicating the wheel (no text or symbols)

Changing foglamp bulbs

These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear bumper:

pass your hand under the bumper,
F turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and remove it,
turn the bulb a quarter turn, pull it out and fit a new bulb.

For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Diagram showing a car interior with a red arrow pointing to a specific area, possibly indicating a directional change or movement.

The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of the dashboard fusebox cover.

For access to it:

unclip the cover by pulling at the top right, then left.
disengage the cover completely and turn it over,

DS 4 (2014) - Changing foglamp bulbs - 2

natural_image 3D diagram of a mechanical component with red internal structure and multiple slots (no text or symbols)

remove carrier on which the tweezer is fitted.

Take care not to touch the silencer; there is a risk of burns if changing a bulb within a few minutes of switching off the ignition.

Changing a fuse

Before changing a fuse:

the cause of the failure must be identified and rectified,
all electrical consumers must be switched off,
the vehicle must be immobilised with the ignition off,
identify the failed fuse using the tables and layout drawings in the following pages.

To replace a fuse, you must:

use the special tweezer to extract the fuse from its housing and check the condition of its filament,
always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating (same colour); using a different rating could cause faults (risk of fire).

If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, have the vehicle's electrical system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a fuse - 1
Good

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a fuse - 2
Failed

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a fuse - 3
Tweezer

The replacement of a fuse not shown in the tables below may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

i Installing electrical accessories

Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment.

Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

CITROËN will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by CITROËN and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

Dashboard fuses

DS 4 (2014) - Dashboard fuses - 1

natural_image Diagram of an open car intake manifold with a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

The fuseboxes are located in the lower dashboard (left-hand side).

P30 P17 P16 P14 P13 P13 P12

Access to the fuses

Refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools".

Fuse tables
F30 F17 F18 F14 F13 F12 F20

F40 F36

Practical information

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the fuses - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the fuses - 4

Fusebox 1

Fuse N°RatingFunctions
F83 AAlarm siren, alarm ECU.
F1310 ACigarette lighter.
F1410 A12 V socket in boot.
F163 ALighting for the large multifunctional storage unit, rear map reading lamps, glove box illumination.
F173 ASun visor illumination, front map reading lamps.
F2815 AAudio system, radio (after-market).
F3020 ARear wiper.
F3210 AHi-Fi amplifier.

Fusebox 2

Fuse N°RatingFunctions
F3615 ARear 12 V socket.
F37-Not used.
F38-Not used.
F39-Not used.
F4025 A230 V/50 Hz socket.

Engine compartment fuses

DS 4 (2014) - Engine compartment fuses - 1

natural_image Diagram of an engine compartment with a red arrow pointing to the internal component (no text or labels)

The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery (left-hand side).

F21 F22 F20 F24 F21 F23 F22 F19

Access to the fuses

Unclip the cover.
^C Change the fuse (see corresponding paragraph).
When you have finished, close the cover carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

Fuse table
F27 F26 F20/F24 F21 F23 F22 F19

275 Practical information

Fuse N°RatingFunctions
F1930 AWindscreen wipers slow/fast speed.
F2015 AFront and rear screenwash pump.
F2120 AHeadlamp wash pump.
F2215 AHorn.
F2315 ARight-hand main beam headlamp.
F2415 ALeft-hand main beam headlamp.
F275 ALeft-hand dipped headlamp.
F285 ARight-hand dipped headlamp.

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the fuses - 2

12 V battery

Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.

ATTENTION BATTERIE SPECIFIQUE EN CAS DE REPLACEMENT IS REPERAR OBLIGATORMENT AU MARS UTILISATION ENVIRONMENT NE PAS INJANDER LES POLIANTES DE LA BATTERIE, UTILISER UN CHARGEUR 12V 24V WARNING SPECIFIC BATTERY IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT REPER OBLIGATORIAL TO THE SPECIFICATION THE VEHICLE DO NOT REPERAR BATTERY POLAINTS UN TOY CHARGER ONION

DS 4 (2014) - V battery - 2

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and specification; the involvement of a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop is essential when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

DS 4 (2014) - V battery - 3

After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start system will only be active after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which depends on the climatic conditions and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).

Access to the battery

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the battery - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of an engine compartment with a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

The battery is located under the bonnet. For access to the (+) terminal:

release the bonnet using the interior lever, then the exterior safety catch,
raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay,
F: lift the plastic cover for access to the (+) terminal.

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the battery - 2

Before doing any work

Immobilise the vehicle: apply the parking brake, put the gearbox in neutral, then switch off the ignition. Check that all electrical equipment is switched off.

Starting using another battery

When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery (external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables.

DS 4 (2014) - Starting using another battery - 1

First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery.

Do not try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger.

Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when the engine is running.

Diagram showing car battery connected to two motors labeled A and B, with positive terminal charges indicated.

Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.

Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B (or earth point on the other vehicle).

Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).

Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes.

Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run

If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again.

Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order.

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery.

Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.

Disconnecting the (+) terminal

Raise the lever D fully to release the clamp E.

Reconnecting the (+) terminal
Diagram illustrating fluid flow or mechanical process with labeled components E and D, showing directional arrows and a valve-like structure.

Position the open clamp E of the cable on the positive post (+) of the battery.
Press down on the clamp to position it correctly on the battery post.
Lock the clamp by lowering the lever D.

DS 4 (2014) - Disconnecting the (+) terminal - 2

Do not force the lever as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.

Reinitialisation after reconnection

After any reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait at least one minute before starting, to allow time for the initialisation of the electronic systems.

By referring to the corresponding sections, you should set or initialise the following systems yourself:

  • one-touch electric windows,
  • time and date,
  • audio and navigation system settings.

DS 4 (2014) - Reinitialisation after reconnection - 1

Check that no alert message or warning lamp comes on after switching on the ignition.

However, if minor problems persist after carrying out these operations, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Charging the battery using a battery charger

DS 4 (2014) - Charging the battery using a battery charger - 1

With Stop & Start, the battery does not have to be disconnected for charging.

Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger.
Connect the battery starting with the negative terminal (-).
Check that the terminals and connectors are clean. If they are covered with sulphate (whitish or greenish deposit), remove them and clean them.

DS 4 (2014) - Charging the battery using a battery charger - 2

Some functions are not available if the battery is not sufficiently charged.

DS 4 (2014) - Charging the battery using a battery charger - 3

The batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste.

Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.

DS 4 (2014) - Charging the battery using a battery charger - 4

It is advisable to disconnect the battery if the vehicle is to be left unused for more than one month.

DS 4 (2014) - Charging the battery using a battery charger - 5

Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery.

All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fire.

Do not try to charge a frozen battery; the battery must first be thawed out to avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery has been frozen, before charging have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked, which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid.

Do not reverse the polarity and use only a 12 V charger.

Do not disconnect the terminals while the engine is running.

Do not charge the batteries without disconnecting the terminals first.

Wash your hands afterwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Charging the battery using a battery charger - 6

Do not push the vehicle to start the engine if you have an electronic or automatic gearbox.

Load reduction mode Energy economy mode

System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery.

When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen...

The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

System which manages the period of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery.

After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio equipment, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined period of thirty minutes.

DS 4 (2014) - Load reduction mode Energy economy mode - 1

This period may be greatly reduced if the battery is not fully charged.

Switching to economy mode

Once this period has elapsed, a message appears in the screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby.

DS 4 (2014) - Switching to economy mode - 1

If the telephone is being used at the same time on the navigation system, it will be interrupted after 10 minutes.

Exiting economy mode

These functions are reactivated automatically the next time the vehicle is driven.

In order to resume the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run for a few minutes.

The time available to you will then be double the period for which the engine is left running. However, this period will always be between five and thirty minutes.

DS 4 (2014) - Exiting economy mode - 1

A flat battery prevents the engine from starting (refer to the corresponding paragraph).

Changing a wiper blade

DS 4 (2014) - Changing a wiper blade - 1

Very cold climate screen \*

Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.

Before removing a front wiper blade

Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.

Fitting

Put the corresponding new wiper blade in place and clip it.
Fold down the wiper arm carefully.

Fitting

Offer up the very cold climate screen to the front of the lower section of the front bumper.
Press around its edge to engage its fixing clips one by one.

Removing

  • Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
    Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.

After fitting a front wiper blade

Switch on the ignition.
Operate the wiper stalk again to park the wiper blades.

Removal

Use a screwdriver as a lever to release each fixing clip in turn.

DS 4 (2014) - Removal - 1

Do not forget to remove the very cold climate screen when:

  • the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,
  • towing,
  • driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Fitting roof bars

For safety reasons and to avoid damaging the roof, it is essential to use the transverse bars approved for your vehicle.

Diagram showing car wheel assembly with red arrows indicating direction of motion or force, likely illustrating steering or steering system components.

When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing points located in the roof frame. The points are masked by the vehicle doors when closed.

Remove the protective covers, levering them off with a screwdriver. Take care not to scratch the paint.

The roof bar fixings include a stud to be fitted to the hole at each fixing point.

Observe the fitting instructions and the conditions of use in the guide supplied with the bars.

Keep the protective covers safe so that they can be refitted after removing the roof bars.

DS 4 (2014) - Fitting roof bars - 2

Maximum authorised weight on the roof rack, for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm (with the exception of bicycle carriers): 80 kg.

As this value is subject to change, check the maximum load figure given in the guide provide d with the roof bars.

If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the vehicle.

Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects which are longer than the vehicle.

Towing the vehicle

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.

Access to the tools

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the tools - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car trunk with two tool tips and a red arrow pointing to the interior (no text or symbols)

The towing eye is installed in the boot under the floor.

To gain access to it:

open the boot,
raise the floor,
secure it by hooking its cord on the hook on the rear parcel shelf support,
remove the towing eye from the holder.

General recommendations

Observe the legislation in force in your country.

Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.

The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence.

When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing bar; rope and straps are prohibited.

When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.

In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:

  • vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road.
  • 4 wheel drive vehicle,
  • when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake,
  • towing with only two wheels on the ground,
  • where there is no approved towing bar available...

Towing your vehicle

DS 4 (2014) - Towing your vehicle - 1

natural_image Diagram of a carabiner with a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

On the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.

DS 4 (2014) - Towing your vehicle - 2

Place the gear lever in neutral (position N on an electronic or automatic gearbox).

Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components (braking, transmission...) and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

Unlock the steering by turning the key in the ignition one notch and release the parking brake.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles.
Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short distance.

Towing another vehicle

DS 4 (2014) - Towing another vehicle - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical clamp or hook component with a red arrow indicating direction, placed on parallel lines (no text or symbols)

On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles.
Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short distance.

Towing a trailer

Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or installation of a bicycle carrier, with additional lighting and signalling.

DS 4 (2014) - Towing a trailer - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a scooter on a wheeled cart next to a car (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.

We recommend the use of genuine CITROËN towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. If the towbar is not fitted by a CITROËN dealer, it is imperative that it is fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.

Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.

Practical information

DS 4 (2014) - Towing a trailer - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Towing a trailer - 3

Driving advice

Distribution of loads

- Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above

1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.

DS 4 (2014) - Distribution of loads - 1

Refer to the "Technical data" section for details of the weights and towed loads which apply to your vehicle.

Side wind

Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.

Cooling

Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant.

As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.

To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.

The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature.

In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.

DS 4 (2014) - Cooling - 1

If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.

Braking

Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long mountain type of descent, the use of engine braking is recommended.

Tyres

Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.

Lighting

Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer.

DS 4 (2014) - Lighting - 1

The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically if a genuine CITROËN towbar is used.

Accessories

A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the CITROËN dealer network.

These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.

They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from CITROËN's recommendation and warranty.

Conversion kits

You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa.

If a towbar and wiring harness are fitted outside the CITROËN dealer network, the installation must be done following the manufacturer's recommendations.

"Protection":

mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, mud flaps, door protective mouldings, bumper protection strips, vehicle cover, protective covers for pets...

"Comfort":

door deflectors, side window blinds, rear screen blind, isotherm module, coat hanger fixed to head restraint, mobile reading lamp, mirror for caravan, scented ar freshener and cartridges, parking sensors...

"Styling":

gear lever knobs, aluminium foot rest, alloy wheels, chrome mirror shells...

"Transport systems":

child seats and booster cushions, boot carpet, boot liner, boot net, boot spacers, transverse roof bars, bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof boxes, DS roof boxes, towbars, wiring harnesses...

"Security and safety":

anti-intrusion alarm, anti-tilt unit, stolen vehicle tracking system, child seats and booster cushions, breathalyser, first aid kit, fire extinguisher, dog guard, pet seat belt, warning triangle, high visibility vest, wheel security bolts, snow chains, non-slip covers...

* To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:

  • ensure that mats are correctly positioned and secured,
  • never fit one mat on top of another.

"Multimedia":

audio systems, steering mounted audio controls, speakers, Hi-Fi module, Bluetooth hands-free system, portable satellite navigation system, semi-integral support bracket for portable navigation system, mapping update CD, driving assistant, portable video screen, portable video support bracket, 230 V/50 Hz socket, 230 V/12 V adaptor, iPhone® compatible mobile phone charger, mobile phone/smartphone bracket, Wi-Fi on board...

DS 4 (2014) - "Multimedia": - 1

Installation of radio communication transmitters

Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a CITROËN dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).

By visiting a CITROËN dealer you can also obtain cleaning and maintenance products (interior and exterior) - including ecological products in the "TECHNATURE" range, products for topping up (screenwash...), paint touch-up pens and aerosols for the exact colour of your vehicle, refills (sealant cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...), ...

DS 4 (2014) - Installation of radio communication transmitters - 1

Depending on the legislation in force in the country, it may be compulsory to have a high visibility safety vest, warning triangle, breathalyzers and spare bulbs and fuses available in the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Installation of radio communication transmitters - 2

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption. Please note this precaution. You are advised to contact a CITROËN representative to be shown the range of recommended equipment and accessories.

289 Practical information

DS 4 (2014) - Installation of radio communication transmitters - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Installation of radio communication transmitters - 4

natural_image Abstract diagram with curved lines, a red square marker, and scattered white squares (no text or symbols)

Technical data

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 1

natural_image Abstract line and symbol design with geometric shapes and colors (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 2

natural_image Close-up of a car wheel with glossy black and white design, featuring a BMW logo on the rim (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 3

MODELS:ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:NX...5FS05FV8/P5FMA5FU8
PETROL ENGINESVTi 120THP 155THP 160THP 200
Cubic capacity (cc)1 5981 5981 5981 598
Bore x stroke (mm)77 x 85.877 x 85.877 x 85.877 x 85.8
Max power*: EU standard (kW)88115120147
Max power engine speed (rpm)6 0006 0006 0005 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm)160240240275
Max torque engine speed (rpm)4 2501 4001 4001 700
FuelUnleadedUnleadedUnleadedUnleaded
Catalytic converteryesyesyesyes
GEARBOXManual(5-speed)Electronic gearbox system(6-speed)Automatic(6-speed)Manual(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement)4.24.24.24.2

* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 4

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol enginesVTi 120THP 155THP 160THP 200
GearboxesManualElectronicAutomaticManual
Model codes:NX...5FS05FV8/P5FMA5FU8
- Unladen weight1 2051 2841 3631 316
- Kerb weight1 2801 3591 4381 391
- Gross vehicle weight(GVW)1 7551 7951 8351 820
- Gross train weight (GTW)on a 12 % gradient2 9553 1952 6352 820
- Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)on a 12 % gradient1 2001 4008001 000
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer within the GTW limit)1 4501 6501 0001 250
- Unbraked trailer640680715695
- Recommended nose weight75757575

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount. Warning: towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37^ C, limit the towed load.

MODELS:ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:NX...9HP09HR89HR8/S9HR8/PSRHH8RHHA
DIESEL ENGINESHDi 90 PEFHDi 110 PEFHDi 160 PEF
Cubic capacity (cc)1 5601 5601 997
Bore x stroke (mm)75 x 88.375 x 88.385 x 88
Max power*: EU standard (kW)6882120
Max power engine speed (rpm)4 0003 6004 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm)230270340
Max torque engine speed (rpm)1 7501 7502 000
FuelDieselDieselDiesel
Catalytic converteryesyesYes
Particle emissions filter (PEF)yesyesYes
GEARBOXManual(5-speed)Manual(6-speed)Electronic(6-speed)Manual(6-speed)Automatic(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement)3.753.753.75-

* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
.../S: e-HDi model fitted with Stop & Start.

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 5

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel enginesHDi 90 PEFHDi 110 PEFe-HDi 110 PEFHDi 160 PEF
GearboxManualManualManualElectronicManualAutomatic
Model codes:NX...9HP09HR89HR8/S9HR8/PSRHH8RHHA
- Unladen weight1 2051 2901 2951 3001 3201 430
- Kerb weight1 2801 3651 3701 3751 3951 505
- Gross vehicle weight(GVW)1 7651 8051 8101 8151 8801 940
- Gross train weight (GTW)on a 12 % gradient2 8653 1053 1103 1153 1803 140
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)on 12 % gradient1 1001 3001 3001 3001 3001 200
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer withthe GTW limit)1 3501 5501 5501 5501 5501 450
- Unbraked trailer640680680680695750
- Recommended nose weight757575757575

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount. Warning: towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37^ C, limit the towed load.

Dimensions (in mm)
1526 / 1533 1531 2052

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 7

natural_image Front view of a car with height dimensions labeled (1525 and 1810), no other text or symbols present.

924 2612 739 4275

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - 9

Identification markings

Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.

A B D C

A. Vehicle identification number (VIN) under the bonnet.

This number is engraved on the bodywork near the suspension damper mounting.

B. Vehicle identification number on the dashboard.

This number is indicated on a self-adhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.

C. Manufacturer's label.

The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying label affixed to the driver's centre pillar.

D. Tyre/paint label.

This label is affixed to the driver's front pillar.

It bears the following information:

  • the tyre pressures, for unladen and laden conditions,
  • the tyre sizes (including the load index and speed rating),
  • the spare tyre inflation pressure,
  • the paint colour code.

DS 4 (2014) - Tyre/paint label. - 1

The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.

DS 4 (2014) - Tyre/paint label. - 2

Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption.

Audio and telematics

DS 4 (2014) - Audio and telematics - 1

natural_image Abstract line and symbol design with geometric shapes and colors (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Audio and telematics - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car with sensor array overlay, showing front and side views (no text or symbols)

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

CITROËN Localised Emergency Call

DS 4 (2014) - CITROËN Localised Emergency Call - 1

In an emergency, press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the CITROEN Localised Emergency Call centre *.

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the call. The green LED goes off.

Pressing this button (at any time) for more than 8 seconds cancels the call.

The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of communication.

This call is dealt with by the CITROËN Localised Emergency Call centre which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location.

DS 4 (2014) - CITROËN Localised Emergency Call - 2

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

If you benefit from the CITROËN eTouch offer, you also have available additional services in your MyCITROËN personal space, via the CITROËN Internet website in your country, accessible on www.citroen.com.

* These services are subject to conditions and availability. Consult a CITROËN dealer.

CITROËN Localised Assistance Call

DS 4 (2014) - CITROËN Localised Assistance Call - 1

Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confi rms that the call has been made *.

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.

Operation of the system

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 3

When the ignition is switched on, the green LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 6

If the orange LED flashes: there is a system fault.

If the orange LED is on continuously: the backup battery must be replaced.

In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer.

If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.

For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of Telematic services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.

MP-3 1 4 2 5 3 6 NAV TRAFFRIC PHONE RADIO MUSIC

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 8

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Operation of the system - 9

For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off following the activation of the energy economy mode.

eMyWay

SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE AUDIO SYSTEM

CONTENTS

01 First steps - Control panel p. 304
02 Steering mounted controls p. 306
03 General operation p. 307
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 309
05 Traffic information p. 322
06 Using the telephone p. 325
07 Radio p. 335
08 Music media players p. 339
09 Audio settings p. 345
10 Configuration p. 346
11 Screen menu map p. 347
Frequently asked questions p. 351

01 FIRST STEPS

MODE button: Selection of the type of permanent display. Long press: black screen (DARK). Continuous press: reinitialisation of the system. Short press: select pre-set radio station. Long press: pre-set the current station. Rotary control knob: Short press without the engine running: on / off. Short press with the engine running: audio source off / restore. Rotation: volume adjustment (each source is independent, including TA messages and navigation instructions). Access to the "Navigation - guidance" menu and display the recent destinations. Open the "Traffi c information" menu and display the current traffi c alerts. Open the "Configuration" menu. Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the navigation demonstration mode. Open the "Telephone" menu and display the list of recent calls or accept an incoming call.

01 FIRST STEPS

Select:

  • the previous/next line in a list or menu.
  • the previous / next media folder.
  • step by step selection of the previous/next radio frequency.
  • the previous / next MP3 folder.

Move up/down, in "Move the map" mode.

Select:

- the next lower / higher radio frequency automatically.

- the previous / next CD track, MP3 track or media.

- the left / right of the screen when a menu is displayed.

Move left / right in " Move the map " mode.

MP3 1 4 2 5 3 6 NAV TRAFFIC PHONE Bluetooth RADIO MUSIC

Abandon the current operation, up one level in the menu.

Long press: return to the permanent display.

Selection and OK confirmation knob:

Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a menu, then confirmation with a short press.

Other than for menus and lists, a short press displays a contextual menu depending on the current screen.

Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale in and out.

Access to the "MUSIC" menu, and display of the CD/MP3/Apple® tracks and folders.

Long press: display the audio settings screen for the "MEDIA (CD/USB/iPod/Streaming/AUX)" sources.

Access to the "RADIO" menu and display the list of stations received.

Long press: display the audio settings screen for the radio tuner source.

Long press: open the "Audio settings" menu: music ambience, bass, treble, loudness, left/right balance, front/rear fader, automatic volume adjustment.

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car steering wheel with dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car steering wheel with dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car dashboard with control buttons and a play button (no visible text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 4

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 5

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 6

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 7

- Change the audio source. Long press: mute.

- Volume increase.

- Volume decrease.

- Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 8

- Rotation Radio -automatic selection of next / previous frequency.

Media: previous / next track. - Press then rotation: access to 6 preset stations.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 9

natural_image Close-up of a black and white interior panel with a hand cursor icon (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 10

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 11

- TEL button: Access to the telephone menu: Call list / Contacts / Hands-free mode / Answer / Hang up.

Accept an incoming call. Long press: reject an incoming call or end the current call.

- Move in the menus. Zoom the map in and out Press: confirmation

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 12

- Abandon the current operation.

Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following displays:

Sands PR CULTURE EUROPE 1 CENOMICS WATER LE HOURS PENGULAR MUSTAVELG Bands survanta Options Ranggar audio Accalizer radio

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 14

natural_image Abstract graphic of a curved arrow with red arrows indicating rotation or cycle (no text or symbols)

-6 22 AVALLON (SALVIGNY LE-BID 01:01 Staum LOS LES BRES A3clm - 07.12 Ave (Rapagery)

"FULL SCREEN MAP"

" TELEPHONE " (If conversation in progress)
Telephone Homebox Gestion de Contacto Fonctions de relatives Fractifs Blaquem

800m DSL (BEV/RES) Non-16000 - Real Lens Magnetic (Rev. Auto)

"MAP IN WINDOW" (If navigation guidance in progress)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 18
SETUP: PARAMETERS date and time, display confi guration, sound, vehicle settings.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 19
Changing the audio source: RADIO : RADIO broadcasts. MUSIC : playing MUSIC.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 20
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 21
For the details of the menus, refer to the "Screen menu map" section.

Display according to context

DS 4 (2014) - Display according to context - 1

A press on the knob gives access to short-cut menus according to the display in the screen.

RADIO:

Activate / Deactivate TA

Activate / Deactivate RDS

Change waveband

FM

AM

TA

TELEPHONE (call in progress):

Private mode

Put call on hold

DTMF ring tones

1 Hang up

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS, CD or USB (according to media):

Play modes:

1 Normal

1 Random

1 Random on all media

1 Repetition

FULL SCREEN MAP OR IN A NEW WINDOW:

1 Stop / Restore guidance

Select destination

Enter an address

Directory

GPS coordinates

Divert route

Move the map

Info. on location

Select as destination

Select as stage

Save this place (contacts)

Quit map mode

Guidance criteria

Access to the "Navigation" menu

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Navigation" menu - 1

Press NAV.

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Navigation" menu - 2

A short press on the end of the lighting control stalk repeats the last navigation message.

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Navigation" menu - 3

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Navigation - guidance"] --> B["List of recent destinations."]
    B --> C["Select destination"]
    C --> D["Journey leg and route"]
    D --> E["Guidance options"]
    E --> F["Map management"]
    F --> G["Stop / Restore guidance"]

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Navigation" menu - 4

To make full use of all of the functions of your navigation system, update the mapping regularly. Contact a CITROEN dealer or order your mapping update at http://citroen Ke navigation.com

To delete the list of recent destinations, select "Guidance options" in the navigation menu then select "Delete last destinations" and confirm. Select "Yes" then confirm.

Deleting just one destination is not possible.

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Navigation" menu - 5

or

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Navigation" menu - 6

Selecting a destination

Towards a new destination

1DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 1Press NAV to display the "Navigation - guidance" menu.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 2
2DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 3Select " Select destination " and confirm, then select "Enter an address" and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 4
3DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 5Select the "Country" function then confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 6
4DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 7Select the "Town" or "Post code" function then confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 8
5DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 9Select the letters in the name of the town or the characters in a post code one at a time, confi rming each one with the knob.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 10
6DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 11Selection the town from the list offered, then confi rmA pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed directly by selecting and confirming "List" in the screen.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 12
7DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 13If possible, enter the "Road" and "N°/X" information in the same way.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 14
Select "Archive" to save the address entered in a contact file.The system allows up to 400 contact fi les to be recorded.
8DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 15Confirm "OK" to start guidance.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 16
9DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 17Select the guidance criteria: "Fastest route", "Shortest route" or optimised "Distance/Time", then select the desired restriction criteria: "With tolls", "With Ferry", or "Traffic info" then confirm "OK".DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a destination - 18

Towards a recent destination

DS 4 (2014) - Towards a recent destination - 1

Delete recent destinations

DS 4 (2014) - Delete recent destinations - 1

Towards a contact in the contacts directory

DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 1

2 Select " Select destination " and confirm, then select "Directory" and confirm. 3 Selection the desired destination from your contacts and confirm "OK" to start the guidance.

3 Selection the desired destination from your contacts and confirm "OK" to start the guidance.

1DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 4Press NAV to display the "Navigation - guidance" menu.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 5
2DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 6Select "Select destination" and confirm, then select "GPS coordinates" and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 7
3DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 8Enter the GPS coordinates and confi rm "OK" to start the guidance.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a contact in the contacts directory - 9

Towards a point on the map

1DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 1With the map displayed, press OK to display the contextual menu. Select "Move the map" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 2
2DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 3Move the cursor using the control to identify the desired destination.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 4
3DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 5Press OK to display the contextual menu for "Move the map" mode.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 6
4DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 7Select "Select as destination" or "Select as stage" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 8
Towards points of interest (POI)The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity(hotels, various businesses, airports...).
1DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 9Press NAV to display the" Navigation - guidance " menu.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 10Select "Search by Name" to search for POIs by name and not byproximity.
2DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 11Select the "Enter an address" functionand confi rm, then select Selectdestination and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 12Search for POIs in the categoriessuggested in the following pages.
3DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 13To select a POI close to your currentlocation, select "POI" and confirm, thenselect "Around the current place" andconfi rm.To select a POI as a stage on the route,select "POI" and confirm, then select"On the route" and confirm.To select a POI as a destination, fi rstenter the country and town (see "Towardsa new destination"), select "POI" andconfirm, finally select "Near" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 14Select the POI and confirm "OK" to startthe guidance.

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.

DS 4 (2014) - Towards a point on the map - 15

List of principal points of interest (POI)

DS 4 (2014) - List of principal points of interest (POI) - 1

Service station

Garage

CITROËN

Covered car park

Car park

Rest area

Hotel

Restaurant

Cafeteria

Bed and breakfast

DS 4 (2014) - List of principal points of interest (POI) - 2

Airport

Railway station

Bus station

Port

Industrial estate

Supermarket

Vending machine

Sports complex, sports centre, sports ground

Swimming pool

Winter sports resort

Vertical sequence of icons representing various public safety and transportation symbols, including planets, police, buildings, and warning signs.

Cinema

Theme parks

Hospital, Chemist, Vet

Police station

School

Town hall

Post office

Museum, Culture, Theatre, Historic monument

Tourist information, Tourist attraction

Risk areas / Danger areas *

An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you. You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month. The detailed procedure is available on: http://citroen Ke navigation.com.

According to availability in the country.

Settings for risk area / danger area alerts

1Press NAV to display the "Navigation - guidance" menu.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 1
2Select "Guidance options" and confirm, then select "Set parameters for risk areas" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 2
3Select:- "Visual alert"- "Audible alert"- "Alert only in guidance"- "Overspeed alarm only".The choice of time of notification defines how long in advance that Risk area warnings are given.Select "OK" to confirm the screen.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 3
1DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 4Press NAV to display the" Navigation - guidance " menu.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 5
2DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 6Select "Journey leg and route" then confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 7
3DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 8Select "Add a stage" then confirm.The address of the stage is entered as a destination, by "Enter an address",a contact in "Directory", or "Previous destinations".DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 9
4DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 10Select "Close to" a route passing close to the stage or "Strict" for a route passing through the stage.Confirm "OK" to start the guidance, and give a general indication of the guidance route.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 11
1DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 12To organise stages, carry out operations 1 to 2 again, then select "Order/delete journey legs" and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 13
2DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 14Select the stage that you want to move in the order.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 15
3DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 16Select and confi rm to save the modifi cations.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 17

DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 18

Select "Delete" to delete the stage.

Calculation criteria

1
DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 19

Press NAV to display the

"Navigation - guidance " menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 20

2
DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 21

Select "Guidance options" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 22

3
DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 23

Select "Define calculation criteria" and confirm.

This function allows modification of:

- the guidance criteria: ("Fastest route ", "Shortest route ", "Distance/Time"),

- the exclusion criteria: ("With tolls" or "With Ferry"),

- traffic avoidance: ("Traffic info").

DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 24
i

If traffic avoidance (Traffic info) is selected, the system suggests an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.

4
DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 25

Select "OK" and confirm to save the modifications.

DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 26

Selecting the points of interest displayed on the map

1DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 27Press NAV to display the "Navigation - guidance" menu.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 284DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 29Select from the various categories the ones that you want to display on the screen.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 30
2DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 31Select "Map management" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 32☀Select "Default" to have only "Filling stations, garages" and "Risk areas" appear on the map (if installed in the system).
3DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 33Select "Map details" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 345DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 35Select "OK" then confirm and select "OK" again then confirm to save the modifi cations.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 36
1Press NAV to display the "Navigation - guidance" menu.
2DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 37 Select "Map management" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 38
3DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 39 Select "Map orientation" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 40
4Select: DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 41 - "Vehicle direction" to have the map follow the direction of travel, - "North direction" to keep the map always North up, - "Perspective view" to display a perspective view.DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 42
DS 4 (2014) - Settings for risk area / danger area alerts - 43 The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode, is configured in the "SETUP" menu.
Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.

Adjusting the volume / Deactivation

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 1

The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission of the message using the volume adjustment control.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 2

The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via the "SETUP" / "Voice synthesis" menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 4

Press NAV to display the "Navigation - guidance" menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 7

Select "Guidance options" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 10

Select " Set speech synthesis " and confi rm.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 13

Select the volume graph and confi rm.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 14

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 15

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 16

Adjust the volume to the desired level and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 17

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 18

Select " Deactivate " to deactivate voice messages.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 19

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 20

Select "OK" and press the dial to confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 21

Male voice / Female voice

1DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 22PressSETUPto display the confi guration menu.DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 23
2DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 24Select"Voice synthesis"and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 25
3DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 26Select"Select male voice"or"Select female voice"then confirm"Yes"to activate a male or female voice. The system restarts.DS 4 (2014) - Navigation voice synthesis - 27

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Access to the "Traffic information" menu

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Traffic information" menu - 1

Press "TRAFFIC".

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Traffic information" menu - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Traffic information"] --> B["List of TMC messages in order of distance from the vehicle."]
    B --> C["Geographic filter"]
    C --> D["Select TMC station (automatic, manual)"]
    C --> E["Display/Do not display messages"]

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Traffic information" menu - 3

or

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Traffic information" menu - 4

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages

TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.

The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffic problem.

1TRAFFICPress the TRAFFIC button to display the "Traffic information" menu.
2Select the "Geographic filter" function and confi rm.
i We recommend:- a fi iter on the route and- a fi iter around the vehicle of:- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
3The system offers a choice of:- "Retain all the messages",or- " Retain the messages " "Around the vehicle", (confirm the mileage to modify and select the distance)," On the route ".DS 4 (2014) - Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages - 1
DS 4 (2014) - Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages - 2Confirm "OK" to save the modifications.DS 4 (2014) - Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages - 3

BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP Beyres LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPETENIA PA BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYRES LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP BAYREWS LAPE TILACRIP

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Principal TMC symbols

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 1

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 2

Weather reports

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 3

Traffic reports

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 4

Wind

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 5

Fog

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 6

Parking

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 7

Snow / ice

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 8

Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 9

Modifi ed signage

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 10

Narrow carriageway

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 11

Slippery surface

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 12

Accident

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 13

Delay

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 14

Roadworks

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 15

Risk of explosion

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 16

Road closed

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 17

Demonstration

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 18

Danger

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 19

No entry

DS 4 (2014) - Principal TMC symbols - 20

Traffi c jam

Receiving TA messages

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 1

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 3

Press RADIO to display the "FM / AM band" menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 6

Select "Guidance options" then confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 9

Activate or deactivate "TA" then confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 11

The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the transmission of this type of alert.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 13

Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing the button. During a message, press the button to interrupt it.

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Access to the "Telephone" menu

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "Telephone" menu - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["PHONE"] --> B["Press PHONE"]
    B --> C["Telephone"]
    C --> D["List of recent calls sent and received with the telephone connected to the system."]
    D --> E["Dial"]
    E --> F["Directory of contacts"]
    F --> G["Contacts management"]
    G --> H["Phone functions"]
    H --> I["Bluetooth functions"]
    I --> J["Hang up"]
    J --> K["Go from the list to the menu (left/right)."]
    K --> L["No telephone connected."]
    K --> M["Telephone connected."]
    K --> N["Incoming call.""]
    K --> O["Outgoing call.""]
    K --> P["Synchronisation of address book in progress.""]
    K --> Q["Telephone call in progress."]
    L --> R["To make a call, select a number in the list and confirm 'OK' to start the call."]
    M --> S["Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of recent calls."]

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be carried out with the vehicle stationary.

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 1

You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.citroen.co.uk (services).

Quick procedure from the telephone

1In the Bluetooth menu of your telephone, select the name of the system from the list of devices detected.DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 2
2Enter a minimum 4 figure code in the telephone and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 3
3Enter the same code in the system, select "OK" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 4

Procedure from the system

1Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 5
2PHONEPress this button.DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 6
3Select "Bluetooth functions" and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 7
4Select "Peripherals search" and confi rm.The list of peripheral devices detected is displayed. Wait until the "Connect" button is available.DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a Bluetooth telephone First connection - 8

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 1

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 2

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 3

Select the name of the desired peripheral from the list of devices detected then confirm

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 4

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 5

Enter a minimum 4 figure code in the telephone and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 6

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 7

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 8

Select "Connect" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 9

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 10

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 11

Enter the same code in the system, select "OK" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 12

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 13

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 14

The system offers to connect the telephone:

  • in "Hands-free mode" (telephone only),
  • in "Audio" mode (streaming: playing music files on the telephone),
  • or "All" (for selection of both modes).

Select "OK" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 15

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 16

Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is started.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 17

Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your contacts.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 18

The "Hands-free mode" should be used in preference if "Streaming" is not desired.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 19

The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 20

On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).

To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone

1PHONEN press PHONE then select " Contacts management" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 1
2aDS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 2Select " New contact " to enter a new contact.DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 3
2bDS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 4Select " Sort by Name/First name " to choose the order in which they appear.DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 5
2cDS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 6Select " Delete all contacts " to delete the contacts saved in the system.DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone - 13

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Editing, importing or deleting a contact

1DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 1Press PHONE then select "Directory of contacts" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 2
2DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 3Select the desired contact and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 4
3aDS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 5Select "Open" to view a contact on the telephone or modify a contact saved in the system.DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 6
3bDS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 7Select "Import" to copy a contact from the telephone to the system.DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 8
3cDS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 9Select "Delete" to delete a contact recorded in the system.DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 10
DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 11It is not possible to modify or delete contacts in the telephone or the SIM card via the Bluetooth connection.
[SZZA]Once the contact has been imported, the Bluetooth symbol disappears, replaced by the telephone symbol which shows that the contact has been saved in the system.
DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 12In the "Directory of contacts" menu, the import and deletion of contacts is done one by one.
[GW78]DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 13Select OK or press the back button to exit this menu.DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 14DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 15DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 16

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Making a call

Calling a new number

Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving. We recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering mounted controls.

Calling a contact

1Press PHONE twice.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 1
2Select "Dial" then confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 2
3Dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad selecting each number in turn.Confirm "OK" to make the call.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 3
1DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 4Press TEL or twice on PHONE.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 5
2DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 6Select "Directory of contacts" then confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 7
3DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 8Select the desired contact and confi rm. If access was via thePHONEbutton, select "Call" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 9
4DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 10Select the number and confi rm to start the call.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - 11

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Ending a call

Calling a recently entered number

1
DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 1

Press TEL, select "Call list" and confirm,

or

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 2

press PHONE to display the calls log.

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 4

2
DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 5

Select the desired number and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 6

To erase the calls log, press PHONE twice, select "Phone functions" and confirm then select "Delete calls log" and confirm.

i

It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park the vehicle as a safety measure.

1a
DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 1

Press PHONE then select "OK" to end the call.

1b
DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 2

Or make a long press on TEL at the steering mounted controls.

1c
DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 3

Or make two short presses on TEL at the steering mounted controls.

1d
DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 4

Or press the MODE button, as many times as necessary, until the telephone screen is displayed.

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 5

Press "OK" to display the contextual menu then select "Hang up" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Calling a recently entered number - 10

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Receiving a call

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 1

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the screen.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 3

"Yes" to accept the call is selected by default.
Press "OK" to accept the call.
Select "No" and confirm to reject the call.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 6

A short press on TEL accepts an incoming call.
A long press on TEL rejects an incoming call.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 7

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Options during a call \*

1
DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 1

During a call, press the MODE button several times to select display of the telephone screen, then press "OK" to open the contextual menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 3

Or make a short press on this button.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 6

2c
DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 7

Select "DTMF ring tones" to use the numerical keypad, so as to navigate through the menu of an interactive vocal server.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 8

2d
DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 9

Select " Hang up " to end the call.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 10

2a
DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 11

Select "Private mode" and confirm to take the call on the handset. Or select "Hands-free mode" and confirm to take the call via the vehicle's speakers.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 12

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.
DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 13

it is possible to hold a 3-way conference call by making 2 calls in succession*. Select "Conference mode call" in the contextual menu accessible using this button.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 14

2b
DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 15

Select "Put call on hold" and confirm to put the current call on hold. Or select "Resume the call" and confirm to resume the call on hold.

DS 4 (2014) - Options during a call \* - 16

* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.

06 USING THE TELEPHONE

Managing paired telephones

Changing the ringtone

1Press PHONE twice.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 1
2Select "Bluetooth functions".DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 2
3Select "List of the paired peripherals" and confi rm.It is possible to:- "Connect" or "Disconnect" the selected telephone,- delete the pairing of the selected telephone.It is also possible to select all pairings.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 3
1DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 4Press PHONE twice.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 5
2DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 6Select "Phone functions" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 7
3DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 8Select "Ring options" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 9
4DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 10You can adjust the volume and the type of ringtone.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 11
5DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 12Select "OK" and confirm to save the changes.DS 4 (2014) - Changing the ringtone - 13

07 RADIO

Access to the "RADIO" menu

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "RADIO" menu - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["FM / AM band / DAB"] --> B["Alphabetical list of stations received"]
    B --> C["Change waveband " (AM / FM / DAB )\n"Guidance options" ("TA, RDS, FM alternative frequencies / DAB")\n"Audio settings " (see this section)\n"Update radio list"]
    C --> D["Go from the list to the menu (left/right)."]
    E["Press RADIO ."] --> F["A long press on LIST refreshes the list of stations received."]
    G["Press ▲ or ▼ or use the rotary control to select the previous or next station in the list."] --> H["This list can also be displayed by pressing LIST on the steering mounted controls."]
    I["RADIO or"] --> J["Go from the list to the menu (left/right)."]

07 RADIO

Changing waveband

Selecting a station

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a fault with the audio system.

1DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 1PressRADIOorOKto display the contextual menu.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 2
2Select "Change waveband".
3Select "AM / FM" and confirm.
The quality of reception is represented by the number of active waves in this symbol.
1a DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 3By alphabetical listPressRADIOorLIST, select the station of your choice and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 4
DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 5By automatic frequency searchPress◀ or ▶ for the automatic search for a lower or higher radio frequency.Or turn the thumb wheel at the steering mounted controls.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 6DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 7
DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 8By manual frequency searchPress▲ or▼ to adjust the radio frequency step by step.DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 9

07 RADIO

Presetting a station

1

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 1

After selecting a station, press one of the buttons on the numerical keypad for 2 seconds to preset the current station.

An audible signal confirms that the station has been preset.

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 2

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 3

2

DS 4 (2014) - 2 - 1

Press the button on the numerical keypad to recall a preset station.

Or press then turn the thumb wheel at the steering mounted controls.

DS 4 (2014) - 2 - 2

DS 4 (2014) - 2 - 3

DS 4 (2014) - 2 - 4

Activate / Deactivate RDS

!

RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

1

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 1
Press RADIO

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 2

2

DS 4 (2014) - 2 - 1

Select "Guidance options" then confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - 2 - 2

3

DS 4 (2014) - 3 - 1

Activate or deactivate "RDS" then confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - 3 - 2

07 RADIO

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 1

Digital radio provides a higher quality reception and also the graphical display of information for the radio station, by selecting "Video mode" in "Radio favourites" (Options).

The different radio multiplex services offer a choice of stations displayed in alphabetical order.

Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 1

"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country.

When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if one exists).

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 3

Press "RADIO".

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 5

Select "Change band" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 7

Selection "DAB" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 9

Change of station in the same "multiplex".

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 10

Manual search for a "multiplex".

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 12

Press "RADIO".

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 13

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 14

Select "Options" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 15

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 16

Select "FM/DAB" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 17

If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue "FM" radio with sometimes a variation in volume.

Display of the "DAB" band then becomes "DAB (FM)". When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system automatically switches back to "DAB".

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking - 18

If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.

Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu

DS 4 (2014) - Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["MUSIC"] --> B["Press MUSIC"]
    B --> C["MEDIA"]
    C --> D["List of the current media tracks"]
    D --> E["Change Media "Eject USB device " (if USB connected)"" "Play mode" ("Normal", "Random", "Random on all media ", "Repetition")" "Audio settings " (see this section)" "Activate / Deactivate AUX input"]
    E --> F["Go from the list to the menu (left/right)."]
    F --> G["LIST at the steering mounted controls."]
    G --> H["This list can also be displayed by pressing LIST"]

CD, MP3 CD / USB player

Information and advice

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 1

The audio equipment will only play audio files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.

It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.

No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

WMA fi les must be of the standard wma 9 type.

The sampling rates supported are greater than 32 KHz.

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 2

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ü) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 3

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format (udf, ...), it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 4

The system supports USB mass storage or iPod devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).

If a partitioned USB memory key is connected to the system, only the first partition is recognised.

Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls.

The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum, 999 tracks per folder.

If the current consumption at the USB port exceeds 500 mA, the system goes into protection mode and deactivates the port.

Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied).

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 7

In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted FAT 16 or 32.

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 8

The system does not support the operation of an Apple player and a USB memory stick connected at the same time.

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 9

It is recommended that official Apple USB cables are used to ensure correct operation.

Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB memory stick in the USB player or connect the USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied)

The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection.

Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time.

The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a USB memory stick. However, the system memorises these lists and if they are not modified, the loading time will be shorter.

Play starts automatically after a period which depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick.

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Information and advice - 11

Selection of source

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 1

The SOURCE button on the steering mounted controls allows a direct change to the next media source.

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["CD / CD MP3"] --> B["USB, iPod"]
    B --> C["AUX"]
    C --> D["STREAMING"]
    D --> E["RADIO"]
    E --> A

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 4

Press MUSIC to display the "MEDIA" menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 7

Select " Following media source " and confi rm.

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 9

Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the desired media source (except for radio which is accessible either with SOURCE or RADIO).

Previous track.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 10
Next track.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 11
Previous folder.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 12
Next folder.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 13
Fast forward.Long press DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 14
Fast backward.Long press DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 15
Pause: long press on SRC .DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 16
LIST: List of USB or CD tracks or foldersDS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 17
Up or down in the list.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 18
Confirm, next menu level.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 19
Up one menu level.DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 20
DS 4 (2014) - Selection of source - 21

Connecting APPLE® players

Audio streaming

1 Connect the Apple player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.

2 Control is via the audio system.

The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts). The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track. The "Shuffle tracks" mode on an iPod corresponds to the "Random" mode on the audio system. The "Shuffle albums" mode on an iPod corresponds to the "Random all" on the audio system. "Shuffle tracks" is restored by default on each connection.

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple ^® player.

Streaming allows audio fi les on your telephone to be played via the vehicle's speakers.
1 Connect the telephone: see "USING THE TELEPHONE". Select "Audio" or "All" profile.
2 If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone. Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system buttons.
! Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source.It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.

Connect the portable device (MP3, WMA player...) to the RCA audio sockets (white and red) using a JACK-RCA audio cable.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio streaming - 1

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle's front view showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or labels)

2

DS 4 (2014) - Audio streaming - 2

Press MUSIC to display the "MUSIC" menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio streaming - 3

3

DS 4 (2014) - Audio streaming - 4

Select "Activate / Deactivate AUX input" and confirm.

First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio streaming - 5

!

Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.

09 AUDIO SETTINGS

1

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 1

They are accessible by the MUSIC button in the control panel or by a long press on RADIO according to the source in use.

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 2

DS 4 (2014) - 1 - 3

2

"Equalizer" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)

  • " Bass "
  • " Treble "
  • "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
  • "Distribution" ("Driver", "All passengers")
  • "Le-Ri balance" (Left/Right)
  • "Fr-Re balance" (Front/Rear)
  • "Auto. Volume" depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)

!

The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys system) of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the number of listeners in the vehicle.

!

The audio settings (Equalizer, Bass, Treble and Loudness) are different and independent for each sound source. The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.

!

On-board audio: Arkamys Sound Staging.

With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an "audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium: truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.

This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio system which processes the digital signals from the media players (radio, CD, MP3...) without changing the audio settings. This processing takes account of the characteristics of the passenger compartment to produce optimum results.

The Arkamys® software installed in your audio system processes the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with the windscreen.

10 CONFIGURATION

Display configuration

1DS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 1PressSETUPto display the"Configuration" menu.DS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 23aDS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 3Select "Choose colour" and confirm to select the screen colour harmony and the map presentation mode:- day mode,- night mode,- automatic day/night mode, according to whether the headlamps are on.DS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 4
2DS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 5Select "Display configuration" and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 63bDS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 7Select "Adjust luminosity" and confirm to adjust the screen brightness.Press "OK" to save the changes.The settings for day and night are independent.DS 4 (2014) - Display configuration - 8

11 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)

DS 4 (2014) - SCREEN MENU MAP(S) - 1

MAIN FUNCTION

DS 4 (2014) - MAIN FUNCTION - 1

Option A

Option A1

Option A11

Option B...

DS 4 (2014) - "NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE" MENU - 1

Select destination

Enter an address

Directory

GPS coordinates

Journey leg and route

Add a stage

Enter an address

Directory

Previous destinations

Order/delete journey legs

Divert route

Chosen destination

Guidance options

Define calculation criteria

Fastest route

Shortest route

Distance/Time

With tolls

With Ferry

Traffi c info

Set speech synthesis

Delete last destinations

Set parameters for risk areas

Map management

Map orientation

Vehicle direction

North direction

Perspective view

Map details

Move the map

Mapping and updating

Description of risk areas database

Stop / Restore guidance

Fastest route

Shortest route

Distance/Time

With tolls

With Ferry

Traffic info

11 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)

"TRAFFIC INFORMATION" MENU

1 Geographic filter
Retain all the messages:
Retain the messages:
Around the vehicle
On the route
Automatic TMC
Manual TMC
List of TMC stations

Select TMC station

Display / Do not display messages

"TELEPHONE" MENU

1 Dial
Directory of contacts

Call
Open
Import
Delete
Cancel
New contact
Sort by Name/First name
Delete all contacts
Import all the entries
Synchronization options
No synchronization
Display telephone contacts
Display SIM card contacts
Display all phone contacts
Contact mem. status

Contacts management

1 Phone functions

Ring options

Delete calls log

Bluetooth functions

List of the paired peripherals

Connect

Disconnect

Delete

Delete all

Cancel

Peripherals search

Rename radiotelephone

1 Hang up

11 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)

"RADIO" MENU

Change Waveband

FM / DAB / AM

Guidance options

TA

RDS options

FM/DAB (auto tracking)

Video mode

Audio settings

Equalizer

None

Classical

Jazz

Rock

Techno

Vocal

Bass

Treble

Loudness

Activated / Deactivated

Distribution

Driver

All passengers

Le-Ri balance

Fr-Re balance

Auto. Volume

Activated / Deactivated

Update radio list

"MUSIC" MENU

Change Media

CD

BT Streaming

USB/iPod

AUX

Audio settings

Activate / Deactivate AUX input

11 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)

"SETUP" MENU

Sound choice

Classic

Crystal symphony

Urban rythmik

Jungle fantasy

Display configuration

Choose colour

Adjust luminosity

Set date and time

Select units

Speech synthesis setting

Guidance instructions volume

Select male voice/Select female voice

Select language

Define vehicle parameters \*

Alert log

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
The route calculation is not successful.The guidance criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation Menu, "Guidance options"\"Defi ne calculation criteria".
I am unable to enter my post code.The system only accepts post codes of up to 5 characters.
The POIs do not appear.The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The risk areas audible warning does not work.The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters for risk areas".
The system does not suggest a detour around an incident on the route.The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of guidance criteria.
I receive a Risk area alert which is not on my route.Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area located on nearby or parallel roads.Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the time for the announcement.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
Certain traffi c jams along the route are not indicated in real time.On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traffi c information.Wait until the traffi c information is being received correctly (display of the traffi c information icons on the map).
The filters are too restrictive.Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffi c information.This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffi c information available.
The altitude is not displayed.On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly.Wait until the system has started up completely. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least 4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
I am unable to connect my Bluetooth telephone.The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on.- Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone on www.citroen.co.uk (services)
The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone communication.Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
Some contacts are duplicated in the list.The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in alphabetical order.Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specifi c order.Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.
The system does not receive SMS text messages.The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the system.
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf, ...).The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system.- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: refer to the information and advice in the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS" section.- The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs.- Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system because they are not of the correct quality.
There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD or connection of a USB memory stick.When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.This phenomenon is normal.
The CD player sound is poor.The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders.
Playing of streaming fi les does not start.The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
I cannot fi nd some radio stations in the list of stations received.The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example).The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio station changes.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.Modifying one without the other is not possible.Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.
When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.Modifying one without the other is not possible.Modify the balance or distribution settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble, Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass, Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance, Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the "None", musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery charge.The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).Delete the fi les supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the fi le structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my iPhone as telephone and to the USB port at the same time, I am unable to play the music fi les.When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the track being played with Apple® players.Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
When I connect my Apple® player or my BlackBerry® to the USB port, I have alert messages on the current consumption by the USB port.When charging, the current consumption of these smartphones is greater than the rating of the USB port, which is 500mA.

MP3 1 4 2 5 3 6 TA INFO LIST SOURCE OK BAND MENU

AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH - 1

The system is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH - 2

For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the audio system may switch off after a few minutes.

CONTENTS

01 First steps p. 358
02 Steering mounted controls p. 359
03 Main menu p. 360
04 Audio p. 361
05 Using the telephone p. 372
06 Audio settings p. 380
07 Screen menu map p. 381
Frequently asked questions p. 383

01 FIRST STEPS

Select screen display between modes: Full screen: Audio (or telephone if call in progress)/

In a window: Audio (or telephone if call in progress) - Time or Trip computer.

Long press: black screen (DARK).

Select preset radio station. Long press: store a station.

On/Off.

Volume adjustment.

Display the list of stations received, CD/MP3 tracks or folders.

Long press: managing the classification of MP3/WMA fi les/update the list of stations received.

Manual step by step search up/down for radio frequencies.

Select previous/next MP3 folder. Select previous/next folder/genre/artist/ playlist in the USB device.

Navigation in a list.

Automatic search up/down for radio frequencies.

Select previous/next CD, USB, streaming track.

Navigation in a list.

MP3 1 4 2 5 3 6 TA INFO LIST SOURCE OK Bluetooth BAND MENU

Abandon the current operation.

Up one level (menu or folder).

Selection of AM / FM / DAB * wavebands.

Access to main menu.

TA (Traffic Announcement) function On/Off. Long press: access to type of information.

Audio settings: audio ambiences, treble, bass, loudness, distribution, left/right balance, front/rear fader, automatic volume.

Select source: Radio, CD, AUX, USB, Streaming. Accept an incoming call.

Confir rmation or display of contextual menu.

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car steering wheel with dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car steering wheel with a red accent marking on the dashboard (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car interior control panel with buttons and dials (no visible text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 4

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 5

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 6

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 7

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 8

- Change the audio source. Long press: mute.

- Increase volume.

- Decrease volume.

- Radio: display the list of stations.

Media: display the list of tracks.

Long press: update the list of stations received.

- Rotation:

Radio: search for the previous / next station.

Media: previous / next track.

Press: confirmation.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 9

natural_image Close-up of a car's side panel with a hand cursor and 'REC' button (no text or symbols visible)

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 10

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 11

- Access to telephone menu: Dial / Directory / Calls list / Voice mail box.

- Move in the menus. Press: confirmation.

DS 4 (2014) - STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS - 12

- Abandon the current operation.

03 MAIN MENU

Screen C

"Telephone": Call, Directory management, Telephone management, Hang up.

Diagram showing five electronic device categories: CD, phone, megaphone, Bluetooth, and USB/I interface

" Multimedia": Media parameters, Radio parameters.

" Trip computer ": Warning log.

"Bluetooth connection": Connections management, Search for a device.

"Personalisation-configuration": Define the vehicle parameters, Choice of language, Display configuration, Choice of units, Date and time adjustment.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 2

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to "Screen menu map" section.

04 AUDIO

Radio

Selecting a station

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 1

The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 3

Press SOURCE or SRC several times in succession and select radio.

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 6

Press BAND to select a waveband.

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 9

Press LIST to display the list of stations received in alphabetical order.

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 11

Select the desired radio station and confirm by pressing OK.

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 13

A press changes to the next or previous letter (e.g. A, B, D, F, G, J, K, ...).

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 14

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 15

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 16

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 17

A long press on LIST builds or updates the list of stations; audio reception is cut momentarily.

DS 4 (2014) - Selecting a station - 18

04 AUDIO

RDS

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 1

RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 2

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 3

When the radio is displayed on the screen, press OK to display the contextual menu.

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 4

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 5

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 6

Select "RDS" and confirm to save. "RDS" is displayed in the screen.

DS 4 (2014) - RDS - 7

Receiving TA messages

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 1

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 3

Press TA INFO to activate or deactivate the reception of traffic messages.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving TA messages - 4

04 AUDIO

Receiving INFO messages

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 1

The INFO function gives priority to TA alert messages. To be active, this function needs good reception of a radio station that transmits this type of message. When a message is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to receive the INFO message. Normal play resumes at the end of the message transmission.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 3

Make a long press on TA INFO to display the list of categories.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 6

Select or deselect categories to activate or deactivate the reception of the corresponding messages.

DS 4 (2014) - Receiving INFO messages - 7

Display RADIO TEXT

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 1

Radio text is information transmitted by the radio station related to the current programme or song.

Screen C

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 3

With the radio displayed on the screen, press OK to display the contextual menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 6

Select "RadioText (TXT) display" and confirm OK to save.

DS 4 (2014) - Display RADIO TEXT - 7

04 AUDIO

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 1

Digital radio provides a superior audio quality and also additional categories of traffic announcements (TA INFO).

The different "multiplex services" offer a choice of radio stations in alphabetical order.

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 2

Change band (FM1, FM2, DAB, ...)

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 3

Change of station within the same "multiplex service".

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 4

Start a search for the next "multiplex service".

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 5

Long press: select the desired categories of announcements from Transport, News, Entertainment and Flash special (availability according to the station).

DS 4 (2014) - DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio - 6

When the radio station is displayed in the screen, press on "OK" to display the contextual menu.

(Frequency hopping (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information on the station, ...)

Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 1

"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country.

When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if it exists).

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 3

Press the "Menu" button.

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 5

Select "Multimedia" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 7

Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" and confirm

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 8

If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue "FM" radio, with sometimes a variation in volume.

When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system automatically switches back to "DAB"

DS 4 (2014) - Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking - 9

If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option barred), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.

04 AUDIO

Audio CD

Playing a CD

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 1

Insert 12 cm diameter circular compact discs only.

Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the quality of the original player.

Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 3

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE or SRC button several times in succession and select "CD".

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 6

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 9

Press LIST to display the list of tracks on the CD.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 12

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward.

DS 4 (2014) - Audio CD - 13

04 AUDIO

CD, USB

Information and advice

DS 4 (2014) - CD, USB - 1

The audio system will only play files with extension ".mp3" or ".wma" and a compression rate that is constant or variable between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.

DS 4 (2014) - CD, USB - 2

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying problems.

DS 4 (2014) - CD, USB - 3

The playlists accepted are types .m3u and .pls.

The number of fi les is limited to 5 000 in 500 directories on a maximum of 8 levels.

DS 4 (2014) - CD, USB - 4

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 directory levels. However, it is recommended that this be kept to 2 levels so as to limit the time taken to access and play the CD. During play, the folder structure is not observed.

DS 4 (2014) - CD, USB - 5

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.

If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

DS 4 (2014) - CD, USB - 6

Do not connect a hard disk or USB device other than audio players to the USB port. This may cause damage to your installation.

04 AUDIO

CD, USB

Playing a compilation

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 2

Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player or connect a memory stick to the USB port, directly or via an extension lead.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 3

The system creates playlists (temporary memory) the creation time for which can take from a few seconds to several minutes.

The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected.

Play starts automatically after a period which depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 4

At a first connection, the order suggested is by folder. When connecting again, the order previously chosen is retained.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 6

To play a disc or memory stick which has already been inserted, press SOURCE or SRC several times in succession and select "CD" or "USB".

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 10

Press one of the buttons to select the next or previous track.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 12

Press one of the buttons to select the next or previous folder in the order chosen.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 13

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 14

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forwards or backwards.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 15

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 16

Press LIST to display the menu of folders in the compilation.

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 17

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 18

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 19

DS 4 (2014) - Playing a compilation - 20

04 AUDIO

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 1

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 2

Select a line in the list.

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 3

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 4

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 5

Select a track or a folder.

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 6

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 7

Up a level in the menu.

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 8

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 9

Skip a track.

DS 4 (2014) - AUDIO - 10

USB memory stick - File sorting

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 1

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 2

Make a long press on LIST or press MENU, select "Multimedia", then "Media parameters" and finally "Choice of track listing" to display the different types of sorting.

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 3

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 4

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 5

Having selected the desired sorting ("By folders", "By artists", "By genres", "By playlists") press OK.

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 6

Then confirm OK to save the modifications.

  • By folders: all folders containing audio fi les recognised on the peripheral device, in alphabetical order without following the folder structure.
  • By artists: all of the artist names defined in the ID3 Tags, in alphabetical order.
  • By genres: all of the genres defined in the ID3 Tags.
  • By playlists: if playlists have been saved.

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 7

DS 4 (2014) - USB memory stick - File sorting - 8

04 AUDIO

APPLE players or portable player

DS 4 (2014) - APPLE players or portable player - 1

The audio fi les on a Mass Storage portable player * can be heard through the vehicle's speakers by connecting it to the USB port (cable not supplied).

DS 4 (2014) - APPLE players or portable player - 2

Management of the device is via the audio system controls.

DS 4 (2014) - APPLE players or portable player - 3

If the portable player is not recognised by the USB port, connect it to the auxiliary Jack socket.

DS 4 (2014) - APPLE players or portable player - 4

The Apple player must be updated regularly for the best connection.

DS 4 (2014) - APPLE players or portable player - 5

The playlists are those defined in the Apple player.

DS 4 (2014) - APPLE players or portable player - 6

The Apple® player must be generation 5 or later.

04 AUDIO

Auxiliary socket (AUX)

Auxiliary Jack socket

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 1

The auxiliary Jack socket permits the connection of a portable non-mass storage device or an Apple ^® player if not recognised by the USB port.

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 2

Do not connect a device to the USB port and to the auxiliary Jack socket at the same time.

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 3

Connect the portable device to the auxiliary Jack socket using a suitable cable (not supplied).

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 4

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle gear shift lever with a red arrow pointing to the pivot point (no text or labels present)

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 6

Press the SOURCE or SRC button several times in succession and select "AUX".

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 7

First adjust the volume on your portable device.

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 9

Then adjust the volume of the audio system.

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 10

The display and management of controls is on the portable device.

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 13

DS 4 (2014) - Auxiliary socket (AUX) - 14

04 AUDIO

Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 1

Depending on the compatibility of the phone

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 2

Streaming allows music files on a telephone to be heard via the vehicle's speakers.

The telephone must support the appropriate bluetooth profi les (Profi les A2DP / AVRCP).

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 4

Pair/connect the telephone: see the "USING THE TELEPHONE" section.

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 6

Activate the streaming source by pressing SOURCE or SRC. Control of playback is via the audio system. The contextual information can be displayed in the screen.

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 7

In certain cases, playing of the audio files must be initiated from the telephone.

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 8

The audio quality depends on the quality of the transmission from the telephone.

Play mode

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 1

The play modes available are:

  • Normal: the tracks are played in order, depending on the classification of the selected files.
  • Random: the tracks in an album or folder are played in a random order.
  • Random all: all of the tracks saved in the media are played in random order.
  • Repeat: the tracks played are only those from the current album or folder.

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 3

Press OK for access to the contextual menu. or

Press MENU.

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 6

Select "Multimedia" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 9

Select "Media parameters" and confi rm.

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 12

Select "Read mode" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 13

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 14

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 15

Select the desired play mode and confirm OK to save the modifications.

DS 4 (2014) - Play mode - 16

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Pairing a telephone First connection

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 1

The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which services are available to you.

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 2

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 3

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone user guide).

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 6

Select "Search for a device".

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 9

Press MENU.

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 10

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 11

A window is displayed "Search in progress...".

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 13

Select "Bluetooth connection" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 14

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 15

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 16

Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one telephone can be connected at a time.

DS 4 (2014) - Pairing a telephone First connection - 17

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 1

In some cases, the reference number of the telephone or the Bluetooth address may appear instead of the name of the telephone.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 2

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 3

A virtual keypad is displayed on the screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits and conform with OK.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 4

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 5

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 6

A message is displayed on the screen of the telephone: enter the same code and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 7

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 8

If pairing fails, try again; the number of attempts is not limited.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 9

Accept the connection to the telephone.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 10

A message appears in the screen to confirm the result of the connection.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 11

Pairing can also be initiated from the telephone by searching for detected Bluetooth devices.

DS 4 (2014) - USING THE TELEPHONE - 12

The directory and the calls list can be accessed after the synchronisation period (if the telephone is compatible).

Automatic connection must be configured in the telephone to allow the connection each time the vehicle is started.

Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth

DS 4 (2014) - Streaming - Playing audio files via Bluetooth - 1

Pair/connect the telephone then listen: see the AUDIO section.

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Managing connections

The telephone connection automatically includes hands free operation and audio streaming. The ability of the system to connect to just one profile depends on the telephone. Both profi les may connect by default.

1 MENU Press MENU.

2 OK Select "Bluetooth connection" and confi rm.

3 OK Select " Connections management " and confi rm. The list of paired telephones is displayed.

Indicates that a device is connected. Indicates connection of the audio steaming profi le. Indicates connection of the hands-free profile.

4 OK Select a telephone and confi rm.

Then select and confi rm: - "Connect telephone" / "Disconnect telephone": to connect / disconnect the telephone or the hands-free connection only. - "Connect media player" / " Disconnect media player ": to connect / disconnect only streaming. - " Connect telephone + media player " / " Disconnect telephone + media player ": to connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free and streaming). - "Delete connection": to delete the pairing.

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Making a call - Dialling

1

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 1

To display the "TELEPHONE" menu:

  • Make along press on SOURCE or SRC.
  • Or, press OK to display the contextual menu. Select "Call" and confirm.
  • Or, press MENU, select "Telephone" and confirm. Select "Call" and confirm.

2

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 2

Select "Dial" to enter a number and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 3

3

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 4

Select numbers one at a time using the ◀ and ▶ buttons and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 6

#

Correction allows numbers to be deleted one at a time.

4

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 7

Select OK and confirm to start the call.

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Dialling - 8

Making a call - Recently called numbers \*

1

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Recently called numbers \* - 1

To display the "TELEPHONE" menu:

  • Make a long press on SRC/TEL.
  • Or, press the dial to display the contextual menu. Select "Call" and confirm.
  • Or, press MENU, select "Telephone" and confirm. Select "Call" and confirm.

2

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Recently called numbers \* - 2

Select "Calls list" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Recently called numbers \* - 3

3

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Recently called numbers \* - 4

Select the number and confirm to start the call.

DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - Recently called numbers \* - 5

i

The calls list includes calls sent and received in the vehicle using the connected telephone.

!

It is possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the vehicle first as a safety measure.

Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Making a call - From the directory of contacts

1To display the " TELEPHONE " menu:- Make a long press on SRC/TEL .- Or, press the dial to display the contextual menu. Select " Call " and confi rm.- Or, press MENU , select "Telephone" and confirm. Select "Call" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 1
DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 2Select "Directory" and confirm.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 3
3Select a contact then confi rm.
DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 4HomeBusinessMobile(depending on the information available in the contact records of the telephone connected).DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 5
4DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 6 Select the number and confi rm.DS 4 (2014) - Making a call - From the directory of contacts - 7

Receiving a call

1An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the multifunction screen.
2" YES " to accept the call is selected by default.Press OK to accept the call.Select "NO" and confirm to reject the call.orPress one of these buttons to accept the call.DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 1DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 2
A long press on ESC or on TEL,SOURCE or SRC also rejects an incoming call.DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 3DS 4 (2014) - Receiving a call - 4

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Managing calls

1

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 1

During a call, press OK to display the contextual menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 2

Hang up

Secret - Mute

(so that the caller cannot hear)

2b

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 3

In the contextual menu:

  • select "Micro OFF" to switch off the microphone.
  • deselect "Micro OFF" to switch the microphone on.

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 4

2a

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 5

In the contextual menu, select " Hang up " to end the call.

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 6

#

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 7

A long press on one of these buttons also ends the call.

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Managing calls - 10

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Combined mode

(to leave the vehicle without ending the call)

2c

DS 4 (2014) - Combined mode - 1

In the contextual menu:

select "Telephone mode" to transfer the call to the telephone. deselect "Telephone mode" to transfer the call to the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Combined mode - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Combined mode - 3

In certain cases, the combined mode has to activated from the telephone.

If the contact has been cut off, when you reconnect on returning to the vehicle, the Bluetooth connection will be restored automatically (depending on the compatibility of the telephone).

Interactive voice response

2d

DS 4 (2014) - Interactive voice response - 1

From the contextual menu, select "DTMF tones" and confirm to use the digital keypad to navigate in the interactive voice response menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Interactive voice response - 2

Consultation call

2e

DS 4 (2014) - Consultation call - 1

From the contextual menu, select "Switch" and conform to return to a call left on hold.

DS 4 (2014) - Consultation call - 2

05 USING THE TELEPHONE

Directory

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 2

The system accesses the telephone's contacts directory, depending on compatibility, and while the Bluetooth connection with it is maintained.

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 3

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 4

With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the directory of the audio system.

Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all, whatever the telephone connected.

The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 5

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 6

Make a long press on SOURCE or SRC for access to the directory

or press OK, and select "Call" and confirm.

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 7

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 9

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 10

Select "Directory" to see the list of contacts.

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 11

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 12

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 13

To modify the contacts saved in the system, press MENU then select "Telephone" and confirm.

Select "Directory management" and confirm.

You can:

- " Consult an entry ",

- " Delete an entry ",

- "Delete all entries".

DS 4 (2014) - Directory - 14

06 AUDIO SETTINGS

Screen C

Diagram showing five electronic device icons: radio, phone, USB flash, Bluetooth, and USB plug.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 2

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 3

Press ♪ to display the audio settings menu.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 4

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 5

The settings available are:

  • Ambience,
  • Bass,
  • Treble,
  • Loudness,
  • Distribution: Personalised or Driver,
  • Left / right balance,
  • Fader (front / rear balance),
  • Auto. volume.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 6

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 7

Select and confirm "Other settings..." to display the next setting in the list.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 8

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 9

The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamy's system), is an audio process which allows the sound quality to be improved according to the setting chosen, corresponding to the position of the listeners in the vehicle.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 10

The Ambience, Treble and Bass audio settings are different and independent for each sound source.

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 11

On-board audio: ArkamysSound Staging.

With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an "audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium: truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.

This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio system which processes the digital signals from the media players (radio, CD, MP3...) without changing the audio settings. This processing takes account of the characteristics of the passenger compartment to produce optimum results.

The Arkamys software installed in your audio system processes the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with the windscreen.

07 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)

Screen C

DS 4 (2014) - Screen C - 1

MAIN FUNCTION

DS 4 (2014) - MAIN FUNCTION - 1

Option A

Option A1

DS 4 (2014) - MAIN FUNCTION - 2

Option A11

DS 4 (2014) - MAIN FUNCTION - 3

Option B...

MULTIMEDIA

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 1

Media parameters

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 2

Choice of playback mode

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 3

Normal

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 4

Random

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 5

Random all

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 6

Repeat

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 7

Choice of track listing

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 8

By folders

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 9

By artists

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 10

By genres

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 11

By playlists

DS 4 (2014) - MULTIMEDIA - 12

Radio parameters

TELEPHONE

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 1

Call

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 2

Dial

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 3

Directory

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 4

Calls list

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 5

Voice mail box

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 6

Directory management

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 7

Consult an entry

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 8

Delete an entry

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 9

Delete all entries

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 10

Telephone management

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 11

Telephone status

DS 4 (2014) - TELEPHONE - 12

Hang up

07 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)

TRIP COMPUTER

1 Vehicle diagnosis

BLUETOOTH CONNECTION

1 Connections management

Search for a device

PERSONALISATION - CONFIGURATION

Define the vehicle parameters *

1 Choice of language

1 Display configuration

Choice of units

Date and time adjustment

Display parameters

Brightness

Choice of sounds

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Fader, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When changing the settings for treble and bass, the ambience setting is deselected.When changing the ambience setting, treble and bass are reset to zero.Choosing an ambience imposes settings for treble and bass. Modifying one without the other is not possible.Modify the treble and bass settings or the ambience setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the balance setting, distribution is deselected.Choosing a distribution setting imposes a balance setting. Modifying one without the other is not possible.Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...).The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio mode.During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.
The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I do not receive any traffic information.The radio station does not broadcast traffic information.Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information.
The stored stations are not found (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...).An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the waveband on which the stations are stored.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.- Due to their quality level, certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is poor.The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
I am unable to connect my Bluetooth telephone.It is possible that Bluetooth is switched off on the telephone or that the telephone has not been made not visible.- Check that your telephone has Bluetooth switched on.- Check in the telephone's settings that it is "Visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone on www.citroen.co.uk (services)
The Bluetooth connection is cut.The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged.Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
The message "USB device error" is displayed on the screen.The USB memory stick is not recognised.The memory stick may be corrupt.Reformat the memory stick (FAT 32).
A telephone connects automatically, disconnecting another telephone.Automatic connection overrides manual connection. Modify the telephone settings to remove automatic connection.
The Apple® player is not recognised when connecting to the USB port.The Apple® player is of a generation that is not compatible with the USB.Connect the Apple® player to the AUX Jack socket using a suitable cable (not supplied).
When I connect my Apple® player or my BlackBerry® to the USB port, I have alert messages on the current consumption by the USB port.When charging, the current consumption of these smartphones is greater than the rating of the USB port, which is 500 mA.
The hard disk or device is not recognised when connecting to the USB port.Some hard disks and devices need a power supply greater than is provided by the audio system.Connect the device to the 230 V socket, the 12 V socket or an external power supply.Caution: ensure that the device does not transmit a voltage greater than 5 V (risk of destruction of the system).
When streaming, the sound cuts momentarily.Some telephones prioritise connection of the "hands-free" profile.Delete the "hands-free" connection profile to improve streaming.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTIONANSWERSOLUTION
In "Random all" play, not all of the tracks are played.In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to 999 tracks.
With the engine off, the audio system switches off after a few minutes of use.When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time depends on the battery charge.The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
The message "the audio system is overheated" appears on the display.In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.

Visual search - Alphabetical index

DS 4 (2014) - Visual search - Alphabetical index - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric design with curved lines and shapes (no text or symbols)

DS 4 (2014) - Visual search - Alphabetical index - 2

Exterior

Remote control 100-106

  • opening / closing
  • antitheft protection
  • starting
  • battery

Wiper controls

Changing a wiper blade

Boot

Temporary puncture

repair kit

Changing a wheel

- tools

- removing / refitting

Snow chains

Changing bulbs

  • rear lamps
  • 3rd brake lamp
  • number plate lamp

Parking sensors

Parking space sensors

Towbar

Towing

Accessories 287-288 Roof bars 282 133-137 281 114 250-254 255-261 262 268-270 232-233 230-231 285-286 283-284 Braking assistance 180-181 Trajectory control 181-182 Tyre under-inflation detection 216-217 Tyre pressures 254, 297 Lighting controls 124-128 Headlamp adjustment 130 Guide-me home lighting 127, 128 Welcome lighting 129 Directional lighting systems 131-132 Changing bulbs 263-267 - front lamps - front foglamps - side repeaters Door mirrors 95-96 Blind spot sensors 222-224 Doors 112-113 - opening / closing - emergency control Child lock 175 Electric windows 115-116 Alarm 109-111 Fuel tank 117-119 Misfuel prevention 120

Lighting controls 124-128

Headlamp adjustment 130

Guide-me home lighting 127, 128

Welcome lighting 129

Directional lighting systems 131-132

Changing bulbs 263-267

- front lamps

  • front foglamps
  • side repeaters

Doors 112-113

- opening / closing

- emergency control

Child lock 175

Electric windows 115-116

Alarm 109-111

Fuel tank 117-119

Misfuel prevention 120

Interior

Visual search

DS 4 (2014) - Interior - 1

DS 4 (2014) - Interior - 2

Boot fittings 155-158

  • rear parcel shelf
  • hooks
  • 12 V socket
  • torch
  • lashing eyes
  • storage compartment

Rear seats 93-94

Rear armrest / Ski flap 154

ISOFIX mountings 171-173

Child seats 162-170, 174

Front seats 88-92 Seat belts 183-186 Airbags 187-192 Panoramic windscreen 12 - blind - sun visor Glove box 145 Deactivating the passenger's airbag 189 Interior fittings 144-154 - auxiliary socket / USB port - cigarette lighter / 12 V socket - portable ashtray - front armrest - 230 V / 50 Hz socket - mats

Instruments and controls

Instrument panels 38-42

Warning lamps 43-53

Indicators

Manual test 57

Setting buttons 58-61

  • trip distance recorder
  • lighting dimmer / black panel
  • customisation of dials and screens

Lighting controls 124-128

Adjusting headlamps 130

Stop & Start 218-220

Lane departure warning system

Memorising speeds

Speed limiter

Cruise control

Door mirrors 95-96

Electric windows 115-116

Dashboard fuses

Opening the bonnet

Adjusting the steering wheel Horn

Wiper controls 133-137 Trip computer 54-56 70-74 peens 221 225 226-227 228-229 270-273 237 94 179 Manual gearbox 205 Electronic gearbox 206-209 Automatic gearbox 210-213 Gear shift indicator 215 Parking brake 196-203, 204

Rear view mirror97
Emergency orassistance call179, 301
Courtesy lamps138
Interior mood lighting139
Multifunction screens64-69
Seat belt and front passenger airbag warning display screen184-185
Audio system357-387
Setting the date / time67, 69
eMyWay satellite navigation system303-356
Setting the date / time67, 69
Hazard warning lamps178-179
Central locking107-108
Black panel 60
Ventilation78-79
Manual air conditioning80-81, 86
Digital air conditioning82-86
Demisting / Defrosting the rear screen87

DS 4 (2014) - Instruments and controls - 2

Technical data - Maintenance

Running out of Diesel fuel 238 Checking levels 241-243 - oil - brake fluid - coolant - power steering fluid - screenwash / headlamp wash fluid - additive (Diesel with particle emissions filter) Changing bulbs 263-270 - front - rear Petrol engines 292-293 Diesel engines 294-295 Dimensions 296 Identification markings 297 Battery 276-279 Energy economy mode 280 Battery Engine compartment fuses 270, 274-275 Bonnet 237 Checking components 244-246 - battery - air filter / passenger compartment filter - oil filter - particle emissions filter (Diesel) - brake pads / discs

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 2

ABS and EBFD systems 180

Accessories 287

Accessory socket, 12V .....146, 147, 151, 157

Adjusting headlamps 130

Adjusting head restraints 90

Adjusting seat belt height 183, 184

Adjusting the steering wheel 94

Airbags, curtain 191, 192

Airbags, front.... 188, 192

Airbags, lateral 190, 192

Air conditioning 34

Air conditioning, automatic 79, 82

Air conditioning, manual 79, 80

Air filter 244

Air flow 34

Air vents 78

Alarm....109

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 180

Anti-pinch....115

Anti-theft 103

Armrest, front 149, 150

Armrest, rear 154

Ashtray, portable 145

Assistance call 179, 301, 302

Audible warning 179

Audio streaming (Bluetooth) ...... 343, 371, 373

Audio system 64,357

Automatic illumination

of headlamps 125, 128

Automatic operation of hazard warning

lamps 179

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen

wipers 133, 134

Auxiliary socket 344, 370

Auxiliary sockets 146

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 3

Backup starting 277

Battery 244, 276-279

Battery, charging 278, 279

Battery, remote control ....105, 106

Black panel....60

Blind spot sensors ....222

Bluetooth (hands-free) 326, 372

Bluetooth (telephone) 326

Bonnet....237

Bonnet stay 237

Boot 114

Boot lamp 140, 157

Brake discs 246

Brake lamps 268

Brake pads 246

Brakes 246

Braking assistance system 180

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 4

Capacity, fuel tank 117

CD 365

CD MP3 366, 367

Central locking 102, 107

Centre console 147

Changing a bulb 263, 268

Changing a fuse 270

Changing a wheel 255

Changing a wiper blade 136, 281

Changing the date 64, 68

Changing the remote control battery .....105

Changing the time 64, 68

CHECK 39,57

Checking levels 241-243

Checking the engine oil level ....54

Checking tyre pressures (using the kit) .....250

Checks 239, 240, 244, 246

Child lock 175

Children....169, 171-173

Child seats 162, 163, 167-169, 174

Child seats, conventional 168

Cigar lighter 146

Citroën Localised Assistance Call 302

Citroën Localised Emergency Call ......302

Closing the boot 102, 114

Closing the doors 102, 112

Cold climate screen 281

Colour screen 68

Connectors, audio ....146, 368, 370

Coolant level 242

Courtesy lamps 129, 138

Cruise control 225, 228

Cup holder 147

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 5

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) .....338, 364

Date (setting) 64, 68

Daytime running lamps ....125, 264, 266

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 6

Deactivating the passenger airbag 188
Defrosting....87,95
Diesel additive level 243
Dimensions 296
Dipped beam 124, 264, 265
Dipstick 54,24
Directional lighting 131, 132
Direction indicators .....127, 178, 264, 265, 268
Doors....112
Doors emergency control 113
Door trays 144
Driving positions (memorising) 92
Dynamic emergency braking ....196, 200

Emergency warning lamps 178, 179
eMyWay 68,303
Energy economy mode 280
Engine compartment 239, 240
Engine compartment fusebox ....270
Engine, Diesel 119, 238, 240, 294
Engine oil level indicator 54, 57, 241
Engine, petrol 119, 239, 292
Engines 292, 294
Environment....34, 106
Equipment settings 40, 64, 68
ESC/ASR 181
ESP 181

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 7

Gearbox, automatic 210, 245, 279

Gearbox, electronic 279

Gearbox, manual 205, 218, 245

Gear efficiency indicator 215

Gear lever 34

Gear lever, automatic gearbox 210

Gear lever, manual gearbox ....205

Glove box 145

G.P.S. 312

Guidance....310,317

Guide-me-home 128

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 8

EBA (Emergency braking assistance) ..... 180, 181

Eco-driving 34

Eco-driving (advice) 34

Economical driving 34

Economy mode 280

Electric window controls 115

Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) ..... 180

Electronic engine immobiliser.... 103, 106

Electronic gearbox system .....206, 218, 245

Electronic stability control (ESC) 181

Emergency boot release 114

Emergency braking system 181

Emergency call 179, 301, 302

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 9

Filling with fuel 117, 119, 120
Fitting a wheel 258
Fitting roof bars 282
Fittings, boot 155
Flashing indicators 127, 178, 265, 266
Foglamps, rear 126, 268, 270
Front foglamps 126, 132, 264, 267
Front seats 88, 89, 92
Fuel 34,119
Fuel consumption 34
Fuel filler flap 117, 120
Fuel gauge 117
Fuel tank....117, 120
Fusebox, dashboard 270
Fuses....270

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 10

Halogen headlamps 264

Hands-free kit 326, 372

Hazard warning lamps 178, 179

Headlamp adjustment 130

Headlamps, directional 130, 131, 264

Headlamp wash 135

Head restraints, front 90

Head restraints, rear 93

Heated seats 90

Heating....34,80

Height and reach adjustment,

steering wheel 94

Hill start assist 214

Hooks 156

Ignition 104
Indicator lamps, status 51
Indicators, direction 178, 265
Inflating accessories (using the kit) .....250
Inflating tyres 34
Inputs for audio system 146, 344, 370
Instrument panel lighting 59
Instrument panels 38-40, 57, 61
Instrument panel screen ....38, 39, 215
Intelligent Traction Control 181
Interior fittings 144, 145
Interior mood lighting 139
ISOFIX 172
ISOFIX child seats 171-173
ISOFIX mountings.... 171

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 11

Jack 255

JACK socket 146, 344, 370

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 12

Keeping children safe 162, 163, 167,

169, 171-173, 188

Key in ignition warning 104

Key with remote control .....100, 102, 103, 106

Labels, identification 297
Lamps, warning and indicator .....43, 50, 53
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) .....221
Level, brake fluid 241
Level, power steering fluid 242
Levels and checks 239-243
Lighting bulbs (replacement) 263, 268
Lighting control stalk 124, 127
Lighting dimmer 38, 39, 59
Lighting, guide-me home 127, 128
Lighting, interior 138, 139
Loading 34,282
Load reduction mode 280
Locating your vehicle 103
Locking from the inside 107
Locking the boot.... 114
Long objects, transporting 154
Luggage retaining strap 155

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 13

Main beam 124, 264, 265

Maintenance 34

Map reading lamps 138

Markings, identification 297

Massage function 91

Mat 152

Menu, main 360

Mini fuel level 117

Mirror, rear view 97

Mirrors, door....95, 96, 222

Misfuel prevention 120

Motorway function (direction indicators) ..... 178

Mountings for ISOFIX seats 171

MP3 CD 366, 367

Music media players 339

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 14

Navigation 309, 310

Number plate lamps 269

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 15

Oil filter 244

Oil level....54,241

Opening the bonnet 237

Opening the boot 114

Opening the doors 112

Operation indicator lamps ......46, 50, 51, 53

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 16

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 17

Paint colour code 297

Parcel shelf, rear 156

Parking brake 204, 246

Parking brake, electric 196, 200

Parking lamps 127

Parking sensors, front 233

Parking sensors, rear....232

Parking space sensor 230

Particle emission filter .....242, 243, 245

Passenger compartment filter 244

Personalisation 60

Player, CD MP3 366, 367

Port, USB 146, 368

Priming the fuel system 238

Protecting children 162, 163, 167,

169, 171-173, 188

Puncture....250

Removing a wheel 258

Removing the mat 152

Repair kit, puncture 250

Replacing bulbs 263, 268

Replacing fuses 270

Replacing the air filter 244

Replacing the oil filter 244

Replacing the passenger compartment filter .....244

Replacing wiper blades....136, 281

Resetting the service indicator ....56

Resetting the trip recorder 58

Rev counter 38, 39, 42

Reversing lamps 268

Risk areas (update) 314

Roof bars 282

Routine checks 244, 246

Running out of fuel (Diesel) 238

Seat, rear bench 93

Seats, electric 89

Seats, rear 93

Selector lever, electronic gearbox system .....206

Serial number, vehicle 297

Service indicator 55, 57

Servicing 34

Setting the clock 64, 68

Short-cut menus ....308

Sidelamps 124, 127, 264, 268

Side repeater 266

Ski flap 154

Snow chains 262

Spare wheel 255

Speed limiter 225, 226

Speedometer 38, 39

Spotlamps, side 129, 267

Start 277

Starting the vehicle 104, 206, 210

Steering mounted controls....306, 359

Stopping the vehicle .....104, 206, 210

Stop Start .....74, 83, 86, 117, 218, 237, 244, 276

Storage 144, 145, 147, 149, 150, 155

Storage compartments 147

Storage drawer 153

Storage net 15

Storing driving positions 92

Stowing rings 155

Synchronising the remote control 105

Synthesiser, voice ....320

System, navigation.... 310

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 18

Radio 335, 336, 361

RCA sockets 344

Rear screen (demisting) 87, 9

Recharging the battery 278, 279

Reduction of electrical load 280

Regeneration of the particle emissions filter .... 24

Reinitialising the electric windows 115

Reinitialising the remote control 105

Remote control 100, 102, 106

Removable screen (snow shield).... 281

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 19

Safety for children 175

Satellite navigation system 68

Screen, colour and mapping..... 40, 307, 347

Screen menu map 347, 381, 382

Screen, monochrome 64, 381

Screen, multifunction

(with audio equipment) 64, 68, 360

Screenwash, front 135

Seat adjustment 88, 89

Seat belts 168, 183, 184, 186

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 20

Table of weights 292, 294

Tables of engines 292, 294

Tables of fuses 270

Tank, fuel 120

Technical data 292, 292

Telephone 326, 330

Temperature control for heated seats .....90

Temporary tyre repair kit....250

Ticket holder 144

TMC (Traffic info) 323

Tools 255

Torch 157

Total distance recorder 58

Towbar 285

Towed loads 292, 294

Towing another vehicle 283

Traction control (ASR) 181

Traffic information (TA) 324, 337, 362

Traffic information (TMC) 323, 324

Trailer 285

Trajectory control systems 181

Trip computer 70, 72, 74

Trip distance recorder 58

Tyre pressures 297

Tyres 34

Tyre under-inflation detection 57, 216

Unlocking the boot 100, 114

Unlocking the doors 100

Update risk areas 314

USB Box 146

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 21

Vehicle configuration ....40, 64, 68

Ventilation 78-80

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 22

Warning lamps 43, 46, 51, 57

Wash-wipe, rear 137

Weights 292, 294

Welcome lighting.... 129

Window controls 115

Wiper control stalk 133, 134, 137

Wiper, rear.... 137

Wipers 52, 133, 134

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 23

Under floor storage 158

Under-inflation (detection) 216

Unlocking from the inside 107

DS 4 (2014) - Technical data - Maintenance - 24

Xenon headlamps 264

This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.

Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it is sold.

The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.

This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.

Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the provisions of the European regulation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproduction or translation of all or part of this handbook is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.

For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

Printed in the EU

Anglais

Automobiles CITROËN

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : DS

Model : 4 (2014)

Category : Car